manualshive.com logo in svg

Panasonic KX-NS1000, Pc Programming Manual

The Panasonic KX-NS1000 is a cutting-edge communication system designed for businesses. This versatile device offers seamless integration of voice, video, and data, ensuring efficient collaboration. Access its comprehensive user manual for free, available for download at manualshive.com. Maximize the potential of your Panasonic KX-NS1000 with this invaluable resource.

Share
Download
background image

2.1.5  Software Interface

This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface.

Main Window

When you log in to Web Maintenance Console, the main window is displayed. For information about connecting
to Web Maintenance Console and logging in, see 

1.2.1  Starting Web Maintenance Console

.

The main window of Web Maintenance Console is divided into several areas, as shown below:

2

3

1

4

1.

Logged in Account Level

The logged in account level is displayed.

2.

Menu Buttons

Provides access to the three main components of Web Maintenance Console:

Button

Description

Home Screen

Clicking this button will load the Home Screen. From the Home Screen, you can:

•

View the status of connected PBXs in the One-look network

•

Add PBXs to your One-look network

•

Select a PBX to perform programming

For more information, see 

3.1  Home Screen

.

Maintenance

Screen

Clicking this button will display the Maintenance Screen tree view items. From the
Maintenance Screen, you can:

•

Check the status and equipment of the selected PBX

•

Backup or update PBX system files

•

Use tools and reports to monitor and analyze system usage

For more information, see 

Maintenance Screen Tree View Items

 below.

42

PC Programming Manual

Document Version  2016-03  

2.1.5 Software Interface

Summary of Contents for KX-NS1000

Page 1: ...nk you for purchasing this Panasonic product Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use In particular be sure to read 1 1 1 For Your Safety Page 14 before using this product KX NS1000 PCMPR Software File Version 004 40000 or later ...

Page 2: ... Manual References The Feature Manual explains what the PBX can do as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and facilities Sections from the Feature Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference Installation Manual References The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX Sections from the Installation Manual are list...

Page 3: ...urning off the power or 2 logout from Web Maintenance Console so that the PBX automatically saves the system data NOTES The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version as indicated on the cover of this manual To confirm the software version of your PBX see How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards in Maintenance Console Software in 2 3 Frequently...

Page 4: ...een 61 3 1 Home Screen 62 3 1 1 Home Screen Add Site Wizard 66 4 Status 69 4 1 Status Equipment Status 70 4 1 1 Status Equipment Status UPS 70 4 1 2 Status Equipment Status CS Information 71 4 1 3 Status Equipment Status PS Information 72 4 1 4 Status Equipment Status UM Port status 73 4 1 5 Status Equipment Status USB 74 5 System Control 75 5 1 System Control Program Update 76 5 1 1 System Contro...

Page 5: ...8 7 3 4 Utility Log UM System Log 129 7 4 Utility Monitor Trace 130 7 4 1 Utility Monitor Trace ISDN QSIG Protocol Trace 130 7 4 2 Utility Monitor Trace V IPGW16 Protocol Trace 131 7 4 3 Utility Monitor Trace V SIPGW16 Protocol Trace 132 7 4 4 Utility Monitor Trace CS Status Monitor Air Sync Group 133 7 4 5 Utility Monitor Trace CS Status Monitor LAN Sync Group 134 7 4 6 Utility Monitor Trace Fax ...

Page 6: ...nfiguration 203 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot 204 9 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Summary 208 9 3 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Activation Key Status 213 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property 217 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property 235 9 5 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Main 235 9 5 2 PBX...

Page 7: ...ation DSP Resource Usage 482 10 PBX Configuration 2 System 483 10 1 PBX Configuration 2 1 System Date Time 484 10 1 1 PBX Configuration 2 1 1 System Date Time Date Time Setting 484 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving 485 10 1 2 1 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Daylight Saving 488 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM 490 10 3...

Page 8: ...PBX Configuration 3 6 Group Extension Hunting Group Member List 679 11 7 PBX Configuration 3 7 Group UM Group 680 11 7 1 PBX Configuration 3 7 1 Group UM Group System Settings 680 11 7 2 PBX Configuration 3 7 2 Group UM Group Unit Settings 683 11 7 2 1 PBX Configuration 3 7 2 Group UM Group Unit Settings Member List 685 11 8 PBX Configuration 3 8 Group PS Ring Group 687 11 8 1 PBX Configuration 3 ...

Page 9: ...vice External Pager 814 13 3 PBX Configuration 5 3 Optional Device Voice Message 816 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Optional Device Voice Message DISA System 816 13 3 2 PBX Configuration 5 3 2 Optional Device Voice Message DISA Message 821 13 4 PBX Configuration 5 4 Optional Device External Relay 824 13 5 PBX Configuration 5 5 Optional Device External Sensor 826 14 PBX Configuration 6 Feature 829 ...

Page 10: ... Configuration 11 3 Maintenance Power Failure Transfer 932 20 UM Configuration 1 Mailbox Settings 933 20 1 UM Configuration 1 Mailbox Settings 934 20 1 1 UM Configuration 1 1 Mailbox Settings Quick Setting 934 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting 936 20 1 3 UM Configuration 1 3 Mailbox Settings Auto Configuration 973 21 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service 975 21 1 UM Configura...

Page 11: ...uting 1129 27 5 Router Configuration Setup 1 5 DMZ 1131 27 6 Router Configuration Setup 1 6 MAC Address 1132 27 7 Router Configuration Firewall 2 1 One Touch Security 1133 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering 1137 27 9 Router Configuration VPN 3 1 VPSS 1148 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec 1153 27 11 Router Configuration VPN 3 3 Pass Through 1175 27 12 Router Configurati...

Page 12: ...9 1 4 PCMPR Software File Version 004 1xxxx 1237 29 1 5 PCMPR Software File Version 004 2xxxx 1239 29 1 6 PCMPR Software File Version 004 3xxxx 1239 29 1 7 PCMPR Software File Version 004 4xxxx 1240 Feature Programming References 1241 12 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 Table of Contents ...

Page 13: ...Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 13 ...

Page 14: ...d result in death or serious injury CAUTION This notice means that misuse could result in injury or damage to property The following types of symbols are used to classify and describe the type of instructions to be observed This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must not be performed This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must b...

Page 15: ...is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum protection against unauthorized access 6 If a User User account password is forgotten it can be confirmed and or changed by a User Administrator or Installer account If a User Administrator account is forgotten it can be confirmed and or changed by the Installer account For details see 2 1 1 Web Maintenance Cons...

Page 16: ... extension PIN of the PBX The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner renter of the PBX To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly recommend a Keeping PINs secret b Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed c Changing PINs frequently 16 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 1 1 1 For Your Safety ...

Page 17: ... using Web Maintenance Console On line Mode On line mode allows you to use Web Maintenance Console on a PC that is connected to the PBX to modify the system data and settings used by the PBX Settings can be modified and results are displayed in real time Modifications to settings change the information in the PBX s temporary memory DRAM To finalize the changes you must either save the changes to t...

Page 18: ...background below can be used when storing a name message password or other text entry data using a PC The available characters vary according to the model of PBX Table 1 Standard 18 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 1 1 3 Entering Characters ...

Page 19: ...e EPM is not supported Always apply the latest updates to your Web browser software For details refer to your Web browser s documentation Only the browsers and browser versions listed above are supported for use with Web Maintenance Console Note When using Windows Internet Explorer there may be a delay when displaying some screens of Web Maintenance Console A message may be displayed that reads St...

Page 20: ...s or implied warranty of any kind These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and or software PC Connection On line Mode To connect to Web Maintenance Console in On line mode both the PC and the PBX must be connected The connection can be made through a local area network LAN a virtual private network VPN or over the Internet A PC can also be connected directly t...

Page 21: ...c arriving at port yyy is forwarded to the correct IP address and port of the PBX in the LAN Port forwarding settings must specify the IP address and the port number of the network router xxx xxx xxx xxx yyy to transfer the packets to the PBX in the LAN so that the packets sent to the global IP address and specified port of the router will be transferred to the IP address and specified port of the...

Page 22: ...ance Console the Home screen will be displayed and programming can be performed For details about accessing the different features of Web Maintenance Console See 2 1 5 Software Interface Connecting to Web Maintenance Console Off line Mode To connect to Web Maintenance Console in Off line mode use the New Offline Mode or Open Offline Mode operations in the Off line Web Maintenance Console program l...

Page 23: ...e mode programming Installation Note Be sure to install and use the latest version of Off line WEB Maintenance Console Before beginning the installation of Off line Web Maintenance Console the following software must be installed on the PC Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Microsoft NET Framework 4 This software can be downloaded from Microsoft s online Download Center To install or uninstall the softwa...

Page 24: ...only when necessary To create a new system data file 1 In the Program Launcher click New Offline Mode The Off line Web Maintenance Console login screen will be displayed in your PC s Web browser For details about the login screen see 2 1 3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console 2 Log in to Off line Web Maintenance Console using the Installer level account and password to start the Easy Setup Wizard...

Page 25: ...eb Maintenance Console For details about account types refer to 2 1 1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts Connecting in On line Mode using the Program Launcher You can also use the Program Launcher to log in to Web Maintenance Console in On line mode You can save the IP address and port information for each PBX in a profile This feature is useful when there are multiple PBXs in your network For detai...

Page 26: ...rt CSV Edit Tool can be used as an external application Programming in Off line Mode Once you have logged in to Off line Web Maintenance Console programming is very similar to On line mode The title bar will be colored differently from when in On line mode When programming in On line mode When programming in Off line mode Some items are not programmable when in Off line mode and those items will b...

Page 27: ...he File Transfer PBX to PC utility in On line mode to save a file with the PBX s current settings For details refer to 7 2 2 Utility File File Transfer PBX to PC 2 Use the Open Offline Mode command in the Program Launcher to load the PBX system file in Off line mode For details refer to Opening an Existing System Data File above 3 Perform the desired programming in Off line mode and then click the...

Page 28: ...ick OK Note The Export button is available only when in Off line mode 3 Open the exported CSV data in the Terminal Label Print utility and then edit the label settings as necessary a In the Program Launcher click Terminal Label Print b Select Open Specify the exported CSV file in the dialog that is displayed and then click OK c Edit the following settings as necessary Label Specifies the label tha...

Page 29: ...ork of KX NS1000 PBXs All PBXs in a One look network can be programmed by logging in to the Master unit via Web Maintenance Console Both the global settings settings that apply to all PBXs and local settings settings that apply only to a single Slave unit PBX of the One look network can be programmed in one session Slave units can also be registered to the Master unit and then configured from the ...

Page 30: ...ormed by logging in to the PBX using Web Maintenance Console A KX NS1000 PBX including the Master unit of a One look network can also connect to other PBXs using standards such as H 323 For details about other networking configurations refer to 14 1 5 One look Network IP Network Type Comparison in the Feature Manual 30 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 1 2 3 PBX Configuration Types ...

Page 31: ...e Backup Master unit also goes offline Slave units will operate in Isolated mode if they are set to do so In Isolated mode each PBX will provide service to the extensions registered to it and for the CO lines connected to it Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX If the unit to which an IP extension e g IP PT or SIP extension is connected fails the extension can automatically switch its connection t...

Page 32: ...32 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 1 2 3 PBX Configuration Types ...

Page 33: ...ion 2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console This section serves as reference operating instructions when using Web Maintenance Console to program the PBX Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 33 ...

Page 34: ...aller level can be used to program which menus in Web Maintenance Console are accessible by Administrator accounts User Administrator Administrator accounts are for general maintenance of users and user settings This account level is used by on site managers and network administrators Administrator level accounts can use Web Maintenance Console to add users or program user settings User Administra...

Page 35: ...et initially For security select an installer password as soon as the PBX system is installed at the site 4 Change the passwords periodically 5 It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum protection against unauthorized access 6 If a User User account password is forgotten it can be confirmed and or changed by a User Administrator or Installer account ...

Page 36: ...ccounts cannot be used when programming in Off line mode A check mark indicates that the menu option is available for that access level Home Screen Menu Option Off line On line A I U A I Site Selection ü ü ü ü ü Add Site ü ü System Information ü ü ü ü ü Logout ü ü ü ü ü Tool Menu Option Off line On line A I U A I System Data Backup Backup to USB ü ü System Data Backup Backup to NAS ü ü NDSS Link D...

Page 37: ...lan ü ü Export Wired Extension ü ü Export PS Extension ü ü Export Quick Dial ü ü Export SIP Extension ü ü Export V IPGW16 GW Settings ü ü Export V IPGW16 DN2IP ü ü Export V SIPGW16 Settings ü ü Export V SIPGW16 Provider ü ü Screen Customize ü ü UM Data Backup ü UM Data Restore ü UM Backup History ü DXDP All OUS ü Contact information ü ü ü ü UT Option Setting ü ü URL Information ü ü Utility Menu Op...

Page 38: ... CS Status Monitor LAN Sync Group ü Fax Protocol Trace ü Fax Task sequence Trace ü UM System Trace Internal ü T1 Signaling Bit Monitor ü T1 Line Trace ü Digital Trunk Error Report ü IP Extension Statistical Information ü UM View Reports ü ü E mail Report ü ü IP CS Information IP CS Statistical Information ü IP CS Information LAN Sync Information ü Activation Key Installation ü Email Notification A...

Page 39: ...line A I U A I Router Command ü UM System Prompts Customization ü ü Automatic Two way Recording ü ü ü ü UM System Maintenance ü ü Flash ROM ID Information ü Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 39 2 1 2 Access Levels ...

Page 40: ...ing the Installer level account is logged in to Web Maintenance Console and is making changes and another user logs in using the Installer level account the user logging in may override the other logged in user so that programming can be performed a warning screen will be displayed for the user that is about to override the currently logged in user Users can view only menus and setting items they ...

Page 41: ... in using the Installer level account name and password The Installer level account name is INSTALLER The default Installer level account password is 1234 After logging in the Easy Setup Wizard welcome screen is displayed Select a language and then click Install Refer to 5 4 1 Easy Setup Wizard in the Installation Manual for detailed and important information about configuring the PBX using the Ea...

Page 42: ... components of Web Maintenance Console Button Description Home Screen Clicking this button will load the Home Screen From the Home Screen you can View the status of connected PBXs in the One look network Add PBXs to your One look network Select a PBX to perform programming For more information see 3 1 Home Screen Maintenance Screen Clicking this button will display the Maintenance Screen tree view...

Page 43: ...pyright notices and licenses Note License information is not displayed when programming in Off line mode Logout Clicking this button will save any programming changes to the PBX s Storage Memory Card and log you out of Web Maintenance Console For more information see 2 2 Logout Extension List View Clicking this button will display the Extension List View in a separate window For details see 6 4 To...

Page 44: ...nctions Users Manage view and add PBX user profiles and account information For details see Section 8 Users PBX Configuration Configure PBX hardware settings for cards equipment and networking Configure network wide programming such as BGM and Class of Service Configure dialing features call routing and incoming call settings Configure call logging SMDR and other PBX maintenance items For details ...

Page 45: ...ystem s memory DRAM and closes the current screen Cancel Abandons changes and closes the current screen Apply Temporarily implements changes to the system s memory DRAM and remains on the same screen Copying and Pasting Data Many setting items in Web Maintenance Console can be copied and pasted to other items on the same screen When the icon is displayed clicking it will open a menu where you can ...

Page 46: ...l items can also be copied and pasted in a manner similar to other software programs Press Ctrl c to copy a highlighted orange colored programming item entry select a target cell by pressing the keyboard arrow keys and then press Ctrl v to paste the copied information to the selected cell 46 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 2 1 5 Software Interface ...

Page 47: ... the PBX and is capable of being used normally Out of service means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX but has been temporarily removed from use This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded Fault means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly or is not functioning correctly For more information see the Installation Manual For details about how to change th...

Page 48: ...ion Portable Station ICD Group PS Ring Group OGM DISA External Pager Fax Unit UM VM Extension UM Group VM DPT Group VM DTMF Group Extension Numbers Names List Displays all available extensions of the types selected in Extension Type and names Click entries to select them and click the Add button when finished to add the selected extensions To deselect an entry click it again Default Available exte...

Page 49: ...Default Not stored Value Range Selected extensions Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 49 2 1 7 Extension Number Setting ...

Page 50: ...Note If the PC running the Web browser that is connected to Web Maintenance Console is shut down or the Web browser is closed any changes that have not been saved to the Storage Memory Card will be lost To save settings while programming click the button on the Home screen Always end your programming session by clicking the button If you are logged in but do not perform any operations in Web Maint...

Page 51: ...k Service 1 IP Address Ports Is the login name and password correct Q Can I perform initial setup of the PBX without being connected to the PBX A Yes This is possible in Off line mode Create a new system data file in Off line mode see 1 2 2 PC Programming Using Off line Mode modify settings as necessary and then upload this file to the PBX later see 7 2 1 Utility File File Transfer PC to PBX Maint...

Page 52: ...on Option from In Service INS to Out of Service OUS Portable Stations Q I cannot register Portable Stations using the method described in 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station A Do the PINs Personal Identification Numbers of the PBX and the Portable Station match Confirm that they are the same Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS Has the Portable Station ...

Page 53: ...r it to operate Numbering Q How do I change the extension number of a wired extension A Change the extension number of the target port to the new number and click Apply Next set the port to OUS status and then back to INS status Q I changed the extension number of a wired extension while the extension was engaged in a call but the display still shows the previous extension number A The extension n...

Page 54: ...rs of those extensions to that of another numbering plan or delete the extension number see 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings and 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings 2 Clear the Leading Number cell 3 Click Apply 4 Modify the No of Additional Digits cell as required 5 Click Apply 6 Enter the desired value in the Lead...

Page 55: ...ial cell of the desired feature 3 Click Apply Q I cannot change a feature number A It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by A feature number An extension A Dial setting see 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE Table Quick Dialing see 10 6 2 PBX Configuration 2 6 2 System Numbering Plan Quick Dia...

Page 56: ...ick Apply or OK in the main screen Q If I reset the PBX directly after modifying settings the modified settings are not updated in the PBX A When you click Apply the settings are updated in the PBX but are not yet saved to the Storage Memory Card If system data is not saved to the Storage Memory Card the PBX will restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX is reset o...

Page 57: ... reception can be set separately Q How do I connect to another PBX using QSIG A From the 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port screen set the Port Type of the port you want to use to either QSIG Slave or QSIG Master Q What programming do I have to perform to use a headset with an IP PT A Set Headset OFF ON on the 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT3...

Page 58: ... 3 On the 11 5 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List screen select the ICD group you created from the ICD Group No drop down list 4 Enter the extension numbers of member extensions in the Extension Number column 5 Click Apply 6 On the DIL tab of the 18 2 PBX Configuration 10 2 CO Incoming Call DIL Table Port Settings screen enter the floating...

Page 59: ...sary to set the extension number of the ICD group in advance Q I have set FWD through system programming but calls are still not being forwarded A Perform the following steps 1 Check that the Forward DND settings of the target extension on the 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND or 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND screen are set to one ...

Page 60: ...60 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 2 3 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ ...

Page 61: ... 3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen This section explains how to setup the main PBX and other connected PBXs from the Home Screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 61 ...

Page 62: ...n Note The first time you login to a PBX using Web Maintenance Console instead of the Home screen the Easy Setup Wizard is run See 2 1 4 Easy Setup Wizard 3 1 4 2 1 PBX management buttons These items provide site management functions as follows Icon Description Add Slave Click this button to run the Add Site Wizard to add a PBX as a Slave unit to the One look network Note This is displayed only wh...

Page 63: ...ave units only in On line mode In the Backup Master drop down list select a site to designate it as the Backup Master site and then click OK For details see 1 2 3 1 One look Networking Survivability Note If you have already designated a Backup Master site and want to select a different site first select Unassigned and click OK Then select the new Backup Master site 2 Master unit PBX icon This is t...

Page 64: ...kup Backup to USB 6 8 Tool UM Data Backup 6 9 Tool UM Data Restore 6 10 Tool UM Backup History 7 3 4 Utility Log UM System Log 7 4 8 Utility Monitor Trace UM System Trace Internal 7 4 6 Utility Monitor Trace Fax Protocol Trace 7 4 7 Utility Monitor Trace Fax Task sequence Trace 7 5 3 Utility Report UM View Reports 7 8 Utility Command 7 9 Utility UM System Prompts Customization UM Configuration set...

Page 65: ...ption Offline Master Unit The Master unit is currently not connected to other PBXs in the One look network and is not operating as the Master unit Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 65 3 1 Home Screen ...

Page 66: ...BXs by their assigned site names and click the right arrow to move them to Selected Site for Registration Click Next to start the registration process 5 On the Registration Executing screen the status of PBXs being registered is displayed 6 On the Registration Completed screen the result of the registration process is shown Click Close to continue Registered Slave PBXs can now be viewed and select...

Page 67: ...ed PBX will be removed one at a time After each successful removal a confirmation message will appear Click Continue to proceed to the next PBX to remove 5 When all removal is complete a message will be displayed Click Close to finish Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 67 3 1 1 Home Screen Add Site Wizard ...

Page 68: ...68 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 3 1 1 Home Screen Add Site Wizard ...

Page 69: ...Section 4 Status This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Status menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 69 ...

Page 70: ...tery Charge Percentage The remaining charge of the UPS battery is displayed percentage value Power Supply Displays the usage status of the UPS if the UPS is engaged in supplying power to the PBX UPS Shutdown Conditions Battery level From the drop down list select the amount of remaining battery level for when to initiate PBX shutdown procedures For more information about setting up a UPS system re...

Page 71: ...lay shows OFF The number of paths that can be used varies for each CS model For more details see the documentation for your CS Group Call Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of a PS Ring Group To view CS information 1 From the Target CS I F Shelf Slot No drop down list select the target shelf and slot To display information on a single card select the shelf number slot num...

Page 72: ...ered PSs will be displayed Extension Number Extension number of the PS Site Number of the site Location Slot Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with Location Port Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with Model Name 1 Model name of the PS Version 1 Software version of the PS 1 This information is displayed for certain PSs only For more information refer to the documentation...

Page 73: ...will be displayed in one of the following ways Online Ready The port is ready to be used Incoming Call The port is handling an incoming call Outgoing Call An outgoing service is being processed Error Occurred An error has been detected Off Line The port is offline This screen can be accessed only in On line mode Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 73 4 1 4 Status Equipment Status UM Por...

Page 74: ...e PBX Before removing the USB memory device from the PBX click Unmount Note If a mounted memory device is removed from the PBX without first clicking Unmount the data on the USB memory device may be damaged None No USB memory device is detected by the PBX This screen can be accessed only in On line mode 74 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 4 1 5 Status Equipment Status USB ...

Page 75: ...m Control This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Control menu of the Maintenance screen when programming using Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 75 ...

Page 76: ...00 Mother Board PCMPR LPR Programs CSIF PCSINF DHLC DLC PDHLC SLC PSLC T1 PT1 PRI23 PPRI23 OPB3 POPB3 ESLC16 EMSLC16 PESLC ECSLC24 EMSLC24 MCSLC16 MCSLC24 PEESLC ELCOT PELCOT ECHO PECHO CSLC16 PCSLC STACK S PSTKS PT Programs KX NT265 PNT265A KX NT343 KX NT346 KX NT343 PNT300 KX NT321 PNT321 KX UT133 KX UT136 PUT13X KX UT113 KX UT123 PUT1XX KX NT543 KX NT546 PNT540 KX NT551 KX NT553 KX NT556 PNT550...

Page 77: ...ion PCSDECT CS using a CSIF card for 2 4 GHz Portable Station PCS24G CS using a DHLC DLC card for DECT Portable Station PDCSDECT CS using a DHLC DLC card for 2 4 GHz Portable Station PDCS24G High density CS for DECT Portable Station PHCSDECT IP CS for Dect Portable Station PICSDCT KX TCAx85 IP CS KX NS0154 1 PNS0154 1 Software updates for PSs e g KX TCA185 are bundled with software updates for an ...

Page 78: ...following directory on the device will be checked for updated files private meigroup psn ippbx update FTP Server The PBX connects to the specified FTP server and checks for updated files Specify an FTP server from the FTP connection name drop down list and specify the number of attempts to connect to the FTP server in No of retries To specify a new FTP site see 28 3 1 Network Service 3 1 Client Fe...

Page 79: ... the PBX If an e mail is entered in Email notification an e mail notification is sent when updated files have been downloaded 3 In Check time and date specify when the PBX will contact the server to check for updates The check can be performed on a daily or weekly basis 4 In Email notification specify up to 2 e mail addresses that will receive an e mail notification when updated files have been di...

Page 80: ...dware The MPR card s firmware will be updated at the same time Be aware that a system reset is necessary when performing the upgrade However to update the MPR card s firmware at the same time as the PFAX firmware Immediately Manual update must be selected for Program Update Type If Timed Update Automatic update is selected the PFAX firmware will not be updated at the same time For Program Update T...

Page 81: ... Click Execute The program files will be updated to the specified PBXs at the specified time Note In a One look network the following processing is performed after you click Confirm 1 If you are updating the PBX s software the check boxes are checked for all sites where the update will be applied 2 A general check of the software version of all sites is performed When updating the software of devi...

Page 82: ... site basis Manual update can also be enabled for PSs The Plug and Update screen lists the PBXs in the One look network by site number and site name By default Plug and Update is set to Off for all sites and device types 1 For each site and device type select On for the features you want to enable Plug Update for IP PT IP CS Enable Plug and Update for IP PTs and IP CSs Plug Update for TCAx85 Enabl...

Page 83: ...installation is finished If Now is set for Time Set the installation will begin at this time Note Users logged in to the Master unit can see the status of all One look network sites Users logged in to a Slave unit may only view the status of that PBX Only WAV files can be installed and file names must not exceed 57 characters in length including the file extension wav If non alphabetic characters ...

Page 84: ...In the Select column specify which PBX sites will delete MOH files from the specified BGM numbers 3 Click Execute to delete the files of the specified BGM numbers Note Users logged in to the Master unit can see the status of all One look network sites Users logged in to a Slave unit may only view the status of that PBX User User level accounts cannot perform this procedure 84 PC Programming Manual...

Page 85: ...e directory on the PC to back up the file to 4 Click OK when finished Note Users logged in to the Master unit can see the status of all One look network sites Users logged in to a Slave unit may only view the status of that PBX Remained Capacity Time indicates the amount of time available for new MOH files to be added The amount of time of any MOH files scheduled to be uploaded in 5 2 1 System Con...

Page 86: ...tails about installing the FAX Card refer to 4 3 4 FAX Card KX NS0106 in the Installation Manual This screen can be accessed only in On line mode 1 Click Execute 2 Click OK 3 The card is restarted and a confirmation message is displayed Click OK 86 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 5 3 System Control FAX Card ...

Page 87: ...he contents of the displayed warning message 3 Click Backup or Skip according to the system s status Backup Click to backup system settings The system will be reset after the backup has been performed Skip The system is reset without performing a backup If you are logged in to the PBX that is reset using this command it is necessary to re log in to Web Maintenance Console to continue programming S...

Page 88: ...PBX settings This screen can be accessed only in On line mode 1 Select the PBX site s to shut down in the Select Site drop down menu 2 Confirm the contents of the displayed warning message 3 Click Backup or Skip according to the system s status Backup Click to backup system settings The system will prepare for shutdown after the backup has been performed Skip The system is prepared for shutdown wi...

Page 89: ...Section 6 Tool This section serves as reference for the Tool menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 89 ...

Page 90: ...ssage sound files stored on the PBX are backed up Activation Key Activation key files that were installed on the PBX are backed up Any or all of the above items may be selected However the system cannot be restored unless System Data is specified 3 Click Execute to back up the specified files If backup data already exists on the USB memory device it will be deleted A confirmation message will be d...

Page 91: ...data includes programming information for the PBX including extension and network configuration information MOH OGM MOH Music on Hold and OGM Outgoing Message sound files stored on the PBX are backed up 3 Click Execute to back up the specified files If backup data already exists on the NAS it will be deleted A confirmation message will be displayed Click Continue 4 A progress bar is displayed to i...

Page 92: ... this data at other PBXs in the QSIG network it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs This screen can be accessed only in On line mode To clear the NDSS Link Data When this tree menu item is selected a confirmation screen will be displayed Click OK to clear the data Click Cancel to keep the data and close the screen 92 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 6 2 Tool NDSS Link Data Cl...

Page 93: ...s The Group Call Pickup feature number default 40 the extension user group number of the extension is assigned to first personal speed dial Note This tool can only be activated if all of the following conditions are met The first Quick Dial setting is empty or is already set to 0 0 is not used for another feature number The Group Call Pickup feature number has been assigned The Personal Speed Dial...

Page 94: ...pe Detail Intercom Wired Extension Portable Station Wireless Extension Portable Station SIP IP PT SIP IP PT Extension UM VM Unified Messaging UM Group VPS Voice Mail ICD Group Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group Portable Station Ring Group UM Group Unified Messaging UM Group VM DPT Group VM DPT Group VM DTMF Group VM DTMF Group Pager External Pager OGM DISA DISA DSS DSS Console DPT I F ...

Page 95: ...s Number Telephone Number Dial CLI Destination CLI Destination Related programming 14 1 PBX Configuration 6 1 Feature System Speed Dial Note Imported Speed Dial and Caller ID data can be copied to a specific speed dial destination The copy range can be specified by selecting the from to of the index Incoming Call DDI DID Table Data Type Import Destination Location Location DID Number Dial In Numbe...

Page 96: ...3 PBX Configuration 8 3 ARS Routing Plan Time Wired Extension Data Type Import Destination No Location selected automatically Extension Number Extension Number selected automatically Extension Name Extension Name selected automatically Related programming 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings PS Extension Data Type Import Destination No Location selected autom...

Page 97: ...Type Import Destination No Location GW Name GW Name GW IP Address GW IP Address GW Group GW Group No Connection for IP GW16 Connection for IP GW16 Protocol Protocol Progress Tone Send Mode Progress Tone Send Mode IP Codec Priority 1st IP Codec Priority 1st IP Codec Priority 2nd IP Codec Priority 2nd IP Codec Priority 3rd IP Codec Priority 3rd Packet Sampling Time G 711A Packet Sampling Time G 711A...

Page 98: ...er Remaining Number of Digits Remaining Number of Digits GW No GW Group Selection GW No GW Group Selection GW Group GW Group GW No GW No Related programming 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property DN2IP V SIPGW16 Settings Data Type Import Destination no fields to select no fields to select Related programming 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property ...

Page 99: ...m the import operation Depending on the type of data imported the relevant programming screen may be displayed Click OK or Apply to complete the import operation If data in a field being imported does not match the required format for the import destination an error message will be displayed when the import operation is attempted and the operation will be canceled This can occur when for example t...

Page 100: ...e separator used in CSV files created using the Export tool is decided by the unit specified in List Separator found in the Windows Control Panel s Regional Options To export system data 1 From the Tool tree menu select Export and then click the type of data to export 2 Select the check boxes next to the names of the fields to export and then click OK 3 If a message window is displayed click OK 4 ...

Page 101: ... menus of Web Maintenance Console to users with the User Administrator account level To modify displayed screens 1 Click the access level to modify 2 Select the items that you want to have displayed Clear the check box beside the names of items you do not want to have displayed Select the check box beside the names of items you want to have displayed 3 Click OK Document Version 2016 03 PC Programm...

Page 102: ...reetings Personal Caller ID Name Interview Personal Group List Name EMD List Member Name c Mailbox Messages Note Mailbox data may not be backed up if the mailbox is in use during the backup process Additionally Unified Messaging system response time may be affected when backing up data For these reasons we recommend backing up data when the Unified Messaging system is not in use Use only the ASCII...

Page 103: ...data to a USB memory device connected to the Master Unit PBX When USB Flash Drive Main Unit is selected a folder selection menu becomes active Specify a folder on the USB memory device for saving the backup data Note Before selecting this option make sure that a USB memory device is connected to the Master Unit PBX NAS Back up the data to a NAS When NAS is selected a folder selection menu becomes ...

Page 104: ...ched the specified amount Delete After Backup Specify to delete messages that have been backed up from the mailbox Message Type Specify to back up all messages or only messages marked as old Note An invalid combination of these settings may prevent a backup from occurring For example if a mailbox is full but there are no messages older than the number of days specified in Retention Days or no mess...

Page 105: ...tems to restore will be highlighted Click a folder in the list to display its name in the text box You can also click a folder name to display that folder s contents and then click a folder to select it Note When restoring data from a local PC up to 40 files can be selected at one time When there are a large number of files to restore they should be restored from the folder on the USB memory devic...

Page 106: ...ond to which UM data items A backed up message cannot be restored to the subscriber s mailbox if the mailbox still contains a New Old Deleted copy of the same message Voice data recorded by users in a KX TVA series VPS can be converted and used as voice data in the KX NS1000 s Unified Messaging system For details refer to 5 3 Starting Web Maintenance Console KX TVA System Prompt and Mailbox Data I...

Page 107: ... that have been performed can be checked on this screen Description Parameters Completion Status Date Time Total Elapsed Time HH MM SS This screen can be accessed only in On line mode Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 107 6 10 Tool UM Backup History ...

Page 108: ...s to OUS simultaneously for the currently selected site To set all DXDP XDP ports to OUS for the currently selected site 1 Access Tool DXDP All OUS from the Maintenance Screen tree view 2 Click OK 108 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 6 11 Tool DXDP All OUS ...

Page 109: ...When users select this tree menu item this information will be displayed for the user s reference 1 Input the following information and then click OK Company Name Telephone Number Fax Number Address URL Email Address Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 109 6 12 Tool Contact information ...

Page 110: ...can enter up to 500 characters in the dial plan text box You can assign up to 20 dial plans separating them with a vertical bar You can assign up to 32 digits per dial plan When OK is clicked the entered text string will be validated If there is a validation error a message will be displayed The default value of the Dial plan depends on the Numbering Plan selected when the Easy Setup Wizard was ru...

Page 111: ...d Messaging Plug in and Fax Driver Tool download buttons displayed to users when they view the Unified Message tab of their profile in the User menu For details see 8 2 1 Users Add User Single User Specify valid URL addresses for Unified Messaging Plug in and or Fax Driver Tool and then click OK Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 111 6 14 Tool URL Information ...

Page 112: ...112 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 6 14 Tool URL Information ...

Page 113: ...Section 7 Utility This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Utility menu of the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 113 ...

Page 114: ...PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Legacy GW1 Legacy GW2 For more information about cards installed in legacy gateways refer to the documentation of the legacy gateway PBX Test Type Available Cards Local loop back diagnosis KX NS1000 PBXs SLC2 LCOT2 PRI Legacy Gateways DHLC DLC SLC8 SLC16 MSLC16 ESLC16 EMSLC16 CSLC16 MCSLC16 ECSLC24 MCSLC24 CSIF LCOT8 LCOT16 ELCOT T1 PRI OPB Card CT Bus diag...

Page 115: ...n 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port CO Setting to Enable To perform a network loopback test 1 Select Point1 or Point2 depending on the type of loopback test you want to perform The available selections may vary depending on the hardware version of the card 2 Click Apply Preparation for the test is complete The test will start automatically 3 After the test is complete select Release an...

Page 116: ... A new window will be displayed 4 In Extension Line in the Site Shelf Slot No drop down list select the extension card to test Each card will be preceded by a 3 digit number following the pattern XYZ X Site number 1 16 Y Shelf number 2 3 Corresponding to Legacy Gateway 1 or 2 Z Slot number 1 11 5 From the Port No drop down list in Extension Line select the port number of the extension to test 6 In...

Page 117: ...e accessed only in On line mode To perform a Ping test 1 Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box 2 Click Test to perform the test The result will be displayed 3 Select an option Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information 1 Enter a file name or select a file to overwrite 2 Click Save Click Cancel to return to the Ping screen Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual ...

Page 118: ...at of a system file supported by the PBX can be transferred Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message The names of all files that can be stored on the Storage Memory Card are as follows System Data Name on Storage Memory Card Corresponding Card DCSYS Mother Board DCSYS_R Mother Board 1 1 DCSYS file format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as DCSYS_R To tr...

Page 119: ... file its name will be SYSERR If there is more than one file the files will be numbered in chronological order up to a maximum of 9 files KX UT series SIP phone configuration data can be transferred to a PC and then imported using the phone s Web user interface For details refer to the Administrator Guide of the relevant KX UT series SIP phone To transfer files to the PC 1 Select the file to downl...

Page 120: ...n To view information of program and activation key files stored in the Storage Memory Card 1 Click on the name of the program or desired activation key file 2 Click Detail The Detail screen will be displayed You can select different files from the File drop down menu to view the details for each file 3 Activation key files can be deleted on the Detail screen Follow the procedure below a Click Del...

Page 121: ... deleted if the Program Update feature s timed update is set or if an update is currently being performed For details see 5 1 2 System Control Program Update Update Program File To delete files from the Storage Memory Card 1 Click on the file to be deleted 2 Click Delete A confirmation screen will be displayed 3 Click OK The display will return to the File Delete screen Document Version 2016 03 PC...

Page 122: ...pen dialog box will be displayed 3 Select the message files to upload The files must be in the WAV format It is possible to select multiple files Note When selecting files to copy to the PBX the file names apart from the file extension cannot be more than 33 characters in length When selecting G 711 codec WAV files to copy to the PBX the total file size of all selected files combined cannot exceed...

Page 123: ...e select the number of that message To transfer all messages at once select ALL The Save dialog box will be displayed 2 Enter a file name 3 Click Save 4 Click OK When you choose to transfer all messages each message is saved as an individual file with a number appended to the file name corresponding to that message s location on the Storage Memory Card When complete the display will return to the ...

Page 124: ...or log information from both the screen and the PBX Log Information Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions The items displayed on screen are as follows Item Description Date The date of the error detection Time The time of the error detection Error Code The 3 digit error code assigned by the PBX For details about the error code refer to the Log Information item in this table Su...

Page 125: ... ID 00 15 Corresponds to site numbers of PBXs in the One look network 1 to 16 W Slot Type For physical slots including physical slots of legacy gateway PBXs blank For KX NS1000 virtual slots asterisk X Shelf Number KX NS1000 unit 1 Legacy gateway 2 3 Non PBX process 5 Convert process 6 Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 125 7 3 1 Utility Log Error Log ...

Page 126: ... 36 Virtual IP CS slots 37 52 When X is 4 YY Convert code When X is 5 YY Process code ZZ Port Number When X is not 4 or 5 ZZ Optional service card port number 01 XX When X is 4 ZZ Convert code When X is 5 ZZ Process number determined by each process Note When there is no parameter for slot and port number YY and ZZ will be displayed as 00 Example Sub code for the mother board 01 10000 For more inf...

Page 127: ...ludes the following information Type Describes the type of system event Date The date and time the system event occurred Message Details about the system event This screen can be accessed only in On line mode Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 127 7 3 2 Utility Log Syslog ...

Page 128: ...escription of the action taken by the user i e Login to Web MC IP Address The IP address of the PC used to access Web Maintenance Console To save the event log as a text file 1 From the Web MC Event Log screen select Save The Save dialog box will be displayed 2 Enter a file name 3 Click Save To clear the event log 1 From the Web MC Event Log screen select Clear Note Users logged in to a Master uni...

Page 129: ...ed Messaging system for troubleshooting purposes This screen can be accessed only in On line mode 1 Click OK to export a UM System Log file 2 Click Save to save the data to a local file 3 Click OK Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 129 7 3 4 Utility Log UM System Log ...

Page 130: ...nd displayed Error Accumulation Trace Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed This trace shows the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets To view trace data 1 From the Site Shelf Slot No drop down list select the target slot Each card will be preceded by the pattern X Y Z as follows X Site number 1 16 Y Shelf number 1 3 1 KX NS1000 physical shelf 2 Legacy Gatewa...

Page 131: ...is complete The trace data has been saved to the Storage Memory Card file name PRTH323 To transfer trace data to the PC 1 Click the File Transfer PBX to PC link to access the file transfer screen The list of files will be displayed Note The file transfer screen can also be accessed from the tree menu see 7 2 2 Utility File File Transfer PBX to PC 2 Select the desired trace data file 3 Click Transf...

Page 132: ...6 Protocol Trace When the progress bar disappears the protocol trace is complete The trace data has been saved to the Storage Memory Card file name PRTSIPC To transfer trace data to the PC 1 Click the File Transfer PBX to PC link to access the file transfer screen The list of files will be displayed Note The file transfer screen can also be accessed from the tree menu see 7 2 2 Utility File File T...

Page 133: ...urrently synchronized with Monitored Value Monitored value dBm of the CS that each CS is currently synchronized with Monitored Level Monitored level signal strength level of the CS that each CS is currently synchronized with Error Rate Error Rate of the CS for each CS that it is currently synchronized with To monitor the status of CSs 1 From the Air Synchronization Group Number drop down list sele...

Page 134: ...taining synchronization 5 Unstable The CS is running unsynchronized 6 Sync Lost Synchronization has been lost 7 Out of system Cannot communicate with the PBX 8 Sync Master CS is the sync master or is a slave acting as the sync master LAN Sync Quality Level Shows the quality of the synchronization depending on the value of LAN Sync Status as follows 1 7 8 is displayed 6 The quality of the synchroni...

Page 135: ... dialog box will be displayed 8 Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file 9 Enter a file name 10 Click Save The dialog box will close Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 135 7 4 5 Utility Monitor Trace CS Status Monitor LAN Sync Group ...

Page 136: ... be accessed only in On line mode The following information is recorded for each fax sent or received Date Time Status Mode Resolution Speed Remote Capacity Local Capacity To save a copy of the recorded information click Save Trace and follow the prompts 136 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 7 4 6 Utility Monitor Trace Fax Protocol Trace ...

Page 137: ...displays a log of events related to fax activity This screen can be accessed only in On line mode To save a copy of the log click Save Trace and follow the prompts Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 137 7 4 7 Utility Monitor Trace Fax Task sequence Trace ...

Page 138: ...ging system Follow the steps below to monitor or log the system trace data 1 Select Internal Trace Display or Trace Clear Setting 1 Check Enable Disable Trace Data 2 Check the data and UM ports you wish to monitor 3 Click OK Display Displays the trace data and or error data 1 Check the data and UM ports you wish to monitor 2 To include error data click the Error Trace tab and check Error Data 3 Cl...

Page 139: ...or vice versa will be highlighted in red until the next screen refresh is performed To view signaling bit information 1 From the Site Shelf Slot No drop down list select the target slot Each card will be preceded by the pattern X Y Z as follows X Site number 1 16 Y Shelf number 2 3 Corresponding to Legacy Gateway 1 or 2 Z Slot number 1 11 2 From the Interval Timer drop down list select the number ...

Page 140: ... Slot No drop down list select the target slot Each card will be preceded by the pattern X Y Z as follows X Site number 1 16 Y Shelf number 2 3 Corresponding to Legacy Gateway 1 or 2 Z Slot number 1 11 2 From the CH No drop down list select the target channel 3 Click Start Trace information will be displayed The information is automatically updated whenever the data being monitored changes 4 Click...

Page 141: ...00 Digital CO line out of sync Loss of Signal RAI 301 Digital CO line RAI signal reception AIS 302 Digital CO line Alarm Indication Signal reception Frame Failure 300 Digital CO line frame failure Loss of Frame Counter of minor communication error CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check error SF Severely errored frame or Severe Framing Error FE Frame synchronization bit error LV Line Code Violation SL Control...

Page 142: ...unter Total number of packets abandoned RTP Arrive Packet Interval MAX ms Maximum time taken for a packet to arrive RTP Arrive Packet Interval MIN ms Minimum time taken for a packet to arrive To view IP extension information 1 From the Card Selection drop down list select the slot number for the card 2 Click Execute The statistical information will be displayed 3 Select an option Click Capture if ...

Page 143: ...ile save dialog is displayed Specify the folder to export the report file to To clear a report For each report all data can be cleared Follow the steps below to clear all report data Some reports can also be set to automatically clear at specified times 1 Select the Report Data Clear Manual tab 2 Select the desired report from Report Parameters 3 Click Report Data Clear To automatically clear repo...

Page 144: ... records are displayed at a time for this report Fax Transfer Report 1 The fax transfer report displays information about faxes received by the Unified Messaging system and transferred to a fax extension It includes the fax reception date the port number used and the fax transfer status for a maximum of 64 fax messages Fax Server Report The fax server report displays the log of all sent and receiv...

Page 145: ...access number of total accesses login and failed accesses Hourly Statistics Report 1 The hourly statistics report displays information about the number of incoming or outgoing calls the connected time per hour etc 1 This report can be set to be automatically cleared according to scheduled settings Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 145 7 5 3 Utility Report UM View Reports ...

Page 146: ...e mail or fax message notifications 5 000 entries Missed call notifications 1 000 entries Other e mail messages system messages etc 1 000 entries Note Messages sent by the PBX such as system alerts will list the user as System and the mailbox number as If these maximum amounts are exceeded older records beyond the maximum amount for each type will be deleted as new entries are recorded To delete a...

Page 147: ... OK NG Total The number of successful failed and total number of other transactions made by the CS for the previous 1 hour Air Sync Change 1 The number of times the CS has changed its air synchronization destination in the previous 1 hour Air Sync Self Running 1 The number of times the CS has switched to self running mode in the previous 1 hour Air Sync Lost 1 The number of times the CS has lost s...

Page 148: ...elected CS Sync Change The number of times the CS has changed its synchronization destination in the previous 1 hour Sync Lost The number of times the CS has lost its synchronization in the previous 1 hour Keep Sync The number of times the CS has switched to keep sync in the previous 1 hour H O Unable The number of times handover has not been possible in the previous 1 hour Keep Sync Ratio The per...

Page 149: ...ble IGMP Querier not found Status cannot be determined because the IGMP querier could not be found Under Diagnosis Diagnosis is being performed OK Synchronization is OK Not OK Signal Jitter Synchronization is susceptible to jitter Not OK Signal delay Synchronization is susceptible to delay Conditional OK Signal Jitter Synchronization is OK but jitter is possible Conditional OK Signal delay Synchro...

Page 150: ...CS by clicking the PS Call Disconnect Log link in the upper right corner of the screen For details see 7 5 5 3 Utility Report IP CS Information PS Call Disconnect Log 150 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 7 5 5 Utility Report IP CS Information ...

Page 151: ...sed only in On line mode The displayed items are as follows Item Description Index The entry s index Date The date the call was disconnected Time The time the call was disconnected Error Message The reason the call was disconnected Connection Error There was an error in the connection Extension Number The extension number of the PS where the call was disconnected PS ID The ID of the PS where the c...

Page 152: ... to install to the PBX and click Install 3 The activation keys will be copied to the Master unit and then copied to the Slave units of the One look network When installation is complete the message The activation key has been installed and activated successfully is displayed 4 Click OK Note You can click the provided link to directly access 9 3 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Activation K...

Page 153: ...te 1 A notification e mail will be sent to the specified addresses at midnight 40 days before the activation key expires Or if the PBX is started within 40 days of the activation key s expiration a notification e mail will be sent at that time to the specified addresses Only 1 notification will be sent Non product licenses with an expiration date A notification e mail will be sent to the specified...

Page 154: ...ill not be received when activation keys are about to expire or information regarding the PBX may be sent unintentionally to a third party 2 In Subject enter the text that will be used for the subject header of e mails that are sent For Format Message body type select the check boxes to specify whether to include the subject in the message body Type1 Message body does not include the subject Type2...

Page 155: ...g File Type drop down menu select a log file to send to the e mail address 2 Enter up to 2 e mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2 3 In Subject enter text to be used as the subject line of the e mail sent 4 Click Execute and the mail will be sent at that time Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 155 7 7 2 Utility Email Notification System Analysis ...

Page 156: ...to 2 e mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2 2 In Subject enter text to be used as the subject line of the e mail sent 3 Click Execute A test mail will be sent to the specified address es Mail settings can be viewed and set in 28 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP 156 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 7 7 3 Utility Email Notification Test Email ...

Page 157: ...2 When finished click Close 7 8 2 Utility Command Router Command Router commands can be sent directly to the built in router using the Commands dialog This screen can be accessed only in On line mode Follow the steps below to use the Commands dialog 1 Enter the desired command then click RUN Results from entered commands are displayed 2 When finished click Close Note Some examples of supported com...

Page 158: ...can restore the system prompts to their initial state by restoring the backup data See 6 9 Tool UM Data Restore for details Deleting Prompts The programmer is able to delete specified system prompts To delete a specific system prompt 1 Select the cell for the desired prompt number 2 Click Delete Recording System Prompts 1 Select the desired system prompt to record and click Play Record 2 Select Re...

Page 159: ...g and Stopping System Prompt Playback 1 Select the desired system prompts 2 Click Play Record 3 Click Play or Stop Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 159 7 9 Utility UM System Prompts Customization ...

Page 160: ...Recording feature for agent extensions These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User Administrator account 1 Click Add Delete 2 Select supervisor extensions from the list and click OK 3 Repeat this procedure to add multiple supervisors Click OK when finished 160 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 7 10 1 Utility Automatic Two way Recording Supervisor Setting ...

Page 161: ...pecify the UM Group of the mailbox specified in 2 4 In What type of calls to record check the boxes to specify if internal calls external calls and or calls made to an incoming call distribution group will be recorded to the mailbox 5 In Select User Extensions click Add 6 Select the check boxes for the agent extensions that the supervisor will control and then click OK 7 Click List View to confirm...

Page 162: ... Incoming Only Only calls from outside parties that are received through an incoming call distribution group are recorded 2 Select On or Off for that setting 3 Click OK when finished The programming items displayed on this screen are as follows Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the extension reference only Default Assigned extension number Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 ...

Page 163: ...s whether CO line calls for the extension are automatically recorded Default Not applicable assigned in Extension Setting Value Range On Off Maintenance Console Location 7 10 3 Utility Automatic Two way Recording Extension Setting List Feature Manual References 20 1 9 Unified Messaging Automatic Two way Recording for Manager ICDG Incoming Only Specifies whether only CO line calls that are received...

Page 164: ...s 7 10 1 Utility Automatic Two way Recording Supervisor Setting Feature Manual References 20 1 9 Unified Messaging Automatic Two way Recording for Manager UM Group No Indicates the UM group number in which the two way recording will be performed reference only Default UM Group No 1 Value Range Group number and group name Maintenance Console Location 7 10 3 Utility Automatic Two way Recording Exten...

Page 165: ... Location 7 10 3 Utility Automatic Two way Recording Extension Setting List PC Programming Manual References 7 10 2 Utility Automatic Two way Recording Extension Setting Feature Manual References 20 1 9 Unified Messaging Automatic Two way Recording for Manager Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 165 7 10 3 Utility Automatic Two way Recording Extension Setting List ...

Page 166: ...e of the following occurs The Stop button is clicked The two way recording time limit or memory capacity has been reached The date and time set in Recording Period is reached 2 To set a specific time when Automatic Two way Recording will stop a In Recording Period select Yes for Setting b In Date Time enter a year month day hour and minute Click on the calendar and clock numbers to select them c C...

Page 167: ...ystem Maintenance Mode Specifies whether to enable or disable System Maintenance Mode System Maintenance Start Time Specifies the System Maintenance start time After specifying the settings on this screen click OK Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 167 7 11 Utility UM System Maintenance ...

Page 168: ...7 12 Utility CS Web Connection This parameter is unavailable 168 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 7 12 Utility CS Web Connection ...

Page 169: ... this screen will display the Flash ROM ID number pre assigned to the PBX used for PBX installation management This screen can be accessed only in On line mode Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 169 7 13 Utility Flash ROM ID Information ...

Page 170: ...170 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 7 13 Utility Flash ROM ID Information ...

Page 171: ...Section 8 Users This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Users menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 171 ...

Page 172: ...group User groups can be set in Extension Settings 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Ext No Specifies the extension number associated with this user Extension numbers can be set in Extension Settings 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 ...

Page 173: ...izard See 8 2 1 Users Add User Single User Edit Button To edit information on an individual user level select a user from the list by clicking on the row of the user to edit then clicking the button to open the Add User Wizard with the selected user s information filled in See 8 2 1 Users Add User Single User Delete Button To delete users 1 Check the box es next to the user s name s and click the ...

Page 174: ...ogin to log in directly to the PBX associated with the UM Group of your mailbox to make changes to these items The and buttons are not visible for User User level accounts 174 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 8 1 Users User Profiles ...

Page 175: ...plete Call Handling you can create a call handling scenario for your extension Up to 20 scenarios can be created and a scenario can be assigned to each absent message Click the Edit button in Advanced Call Transfer Setting to open the window for programming Select a Scenario number 1 20 from the drop down menu then program the settings for that scenario Click OK at the bottom of the window when fi...

Page 176: ...nario Call Transfer Status VIP Filter Specifies whether calls from certain telephone numbers will be transferred directly to a specified extension or telephone number Note This setting can only be set to Enable when Call Transfer Status Selection is set to Leave a Message Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 8 1 1 Users User Profiles Advanced setting Feature Manu...

Page 177: ...ation 8 1 1 Users User Profiles Advanced setting Feature Manual References 20 1 14 Unified Messaging Call Transfer Scenario Call Transfer Status Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu Select a Custom Service from the drop down menu if Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu is selected for Call Transfer Status Selection Default 1 Value Range Custom Service Maintenance Console Location 8 1 1 U...

Page 178: ...e transferred to the number specified in Call Transfer Status Transfer to specified telephone number 1 the call will be transferred according to these settings for this scenario in numerical order of priority Note This sequence has higher priority than the alternate extension transfer sequence specified in 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters PBX Environment Alternate Extension T...

Page 179: ...rences 20 1 14 Unified Messaging Call Transfer Scenario Incomplete Call Handling for Busy Specifies how the scenario handles a call when the destination is busy Note More than one option can be selected Default Leave a Message Transfer to Operator Return to Top Menu Value Range Leave a Message Allows the caller to record a message Transfer to a covering extension Transfers the caller to a covering...

Page 180: ...r 14 5 PBX Configuration 6 5 Feature Absent Message Temporary Scenario Setting a scenario here will use that scenario indefinitely A scenario set here will be used regardless of the subscriber s extension status Selecting None will remove the setting Absent Message 1 9 The selected scenario will be used when the indicated Absent Message is set at the extension 180 PC Programming Manual Document Ve...

Page 181: ...m the drop down list User groups can be set in Extension Settings 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings User Level Select a User Level from the drop down list The Installer level account may select User User or User Administrator levels User Administrator level accounts may only selec...

Page 182: ...d when the Extension PIN is input the Extension PIN is also copied to the following settings according to the user s designated mailbox Mailbox Password in the User Profiles Unified Message tab 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Mailbox Password Notice If the Extension PIN to be copied has less characters than the minimum number of characters required for ...

Page 183: ...rompt 4 Click Disconnect When Import from recorded file is selected 1 Click Browse The Open dialog box appears 2 Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you wish to import 3 Select the desired WAV file 4 Click Open to import the file 5 Click Upload 6 Click OK To start and stop prompt playback 1 Select the desired prompt 2 Click Play Record 3 Click Play or Stop 4 Click OK To delete a specif...

Page 184: ...DND settings for extension calls For the FWD destination Phone Home or Phone Mobile as specified in the Contact tab or a manually input number can be specified Speed Dialing View Edit Click this button to open the Speed Dial screen The appropriate screen wired extension or portable station will be opened according to the extension specified for the user Flexible Button View Edit Click this button ...

Page 185: ...n The format for copying the Extension Name can be selected as follows 1 Click Setup Users User Profiles 2 On the Option tab for Rule of copy to extension name select one of the following Rule A First Name space Last Name Rule B Last Name First Name For more information refer to 5 10 Configuration of Users in the Installation Manual Login ID The extension number i e if the extension is 101 the Log...

Page 186: ...oup number and Automatic Two way Recording destination mailbox is displayed You can specify which types of calls will recorded for each extension 1 For an extension click the setting for Internal Call External Call or ICDG Incoming Only Internal Call Extension to extension calls are recorded External Call Calls with outside parties are recorded ICDG Incoming Only Only calls that are received by th...

Page 187: ...r of the party calling the recorded extension Caller Name Specify the name of the party that called the recorded extension may not be available for all recorded messages Length Specify the length of the recorded conversations Period Specify a time period in which calls were recorded To play a message For playback on the PC 1 Select the check box of a message to play 2 At the bottom of the screen s...

Page 188: ...rst registered ACD supervisor Value Range Registered ACD supervisors Maintenance Console Location 8 4 1 Users ICDG Management Group Monitor Feature Manual References 10 1 8 ICD Group Features Supervisory Feature ACD Start Monitor Click the Start Monitor button to start monitoring the target ICD group This feature requires the Call Center Feature Enhancement activation key or the Built in ACD repor...

Page 189: ... ICD groups Maintenance Console Location 8 4 1 Users ICDG Management Group Monitor Feature Manual References 10 1 8 ICD Group Features Supervisory Feature ACD Options Member Status View Mode Specifies the display mode of the status of group members Default Simple Value Range Standard Simple Maintenance Console Location 8 4 1 Users ICDG Management Group Monitor Feature Manual References 10 1 8 ICD ...

Page 190: ... Specifies the waiting time after which calls are highlighted on the monitor screen When this setting is set to 0 all waiting calls are highlighted Default 5 00 Value Range 0 10 00 Maintenance Console Location 8 4 1 Users ICDG Management Group Monitor Feature Manual References 10 1 8 ICD Group Features Supervisory Feature ACD Options Highlighted Display Settings Color Mode Specifies the color mode...

Page 191: ...esolution of the monitor screen for full screen display Note When you select Automatic the system automatically recognizes the specified resolution of your PC display and selects a full screen resolution from the following display resolutions If any of these sizes do not match the specified resolution for your PC display select the resolution that is smaller than and closest to your monitor s maxi...

Page 192: ...in each profile 1 Click the Report Profiles button 2 To load a previously saved report profile click a profile to select it and then click the Load button 3 To save the current report profile assign a name in Profile Name max 32 characters and then click the Save button Maintenance Console Location 8 4 2 Users ICDG Management ACD Report Feature Manual References 10 1 8 ICD Group Features Superviso...

Page 193: ...ncoming Calls Total The number of incoming calls received by the target ICD group Answered The number of incoming calls answered by the target ICD group Lost The number of incoming calls to the target ICD group canceled by the caller Overflow The number of overflowed incoming calls to the target ICD group Talk Time Total The total talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group HH MM SS D ...

Page 194: ... output the report to a local PC as a file Print Click the Print button to print the report 5 Click the Close button to close the ACD Report Group Report screen Maintenance Console Location 8 4 2 Users ICDG Management ACD Report Feature Manual References 10 1 8 ICD Group Features Supervisory Feature ACD Group Filter Settings View Mode Selects the monitoring view mode from a drop down list Default ...

Page 195: ...set Start Date Start Time End Date End Time also Maintenance Console Location 8 4 2 Users ICDG Management ACD Report Feature Manual References 10 1 8 ICD Group Features Supervisory Feature ACD Agent Agent View Report To display a report according to agents follow the procedure below This feature requires the Call Center Feature Enhancement activation key or the Built in ACD report activation key I...

Page 196: ... Export button to output the report to a local PC as a file Print Click the Print button to print the report 5 Click the Close button to close the ACD Report Agent Report screen Maintenance Console Location 8 4 2 Users ICDG Management ACD Report Feature Manual References 10 1 8 ICD Group Features Supervisory Feature ACD Agent Filter Settings View Mode Selects the monitoring view mode from a drop d...

Page 197: ...ustom Period is selected set Start Date Start Time End Date End Time also Maintenance Console Location 8 4 2 Users ICDG Management ACD Report Feature Manual References 10 1 8 ICD Group Features Supervisory Feature ACD Call Call View Report To display a report according to calls follow the procedure below This feature requires the Call Center Feature Enhancement activation key or the Built in ACD r...

Page 198: ...or details see 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Call Log for Built in ACD Report ICD Group Unanswered Call Log 3 Reports can be outputted in the following 2 ways Export Click the Export button to output the report to a local PC as a file Print Click the Print button to print the report 4 Click the Close button to close the ACD Report Call ...

Page 199: ...al References 10 1 8 ICD Group Features Supervisory Feature ACD Call Filter Settings Call Filter Mode Calls that are the target of an ACD report can be filtered in the following 3 ways Default Caller ID CLIP Filter Value Range Caller ID CLIP Filter Filtering according to caller ID or CLIP 1 Click Caller ID CLIP Filter 2 Set the target caller ID or CLIP maximum 10 Talk Wait Duration Filter Filterin...

Page 200: ...ole Location 8 4 2 Users ICDG Management ACD Report Feature Manual References 10 1 8 ICD Group Features Supervisory Feature ACD 200 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 8 4 2 Users ICDG Management ACD Report ...

Page 201: ...etc and time of day for when the export should take place 6 Select the type of CSV separator value to be used for the exported CSV files 7 In Device select a USB memory device or NAS and then specify the folder on the selected device where you want to save the ACD scheduled export file 8 Click OK Note Installer and User Administrator level accounts can select a supervisor from the Supervisor selec...

Page 202: ...9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 1 PT LCD Time Display To back up the export history of ACD Report data 1 Click Backup 2 Click OK 3 Specify the folder and file name to export the history file to and click Save The export history of ACD Report data on the current screen is saved as a text file When you export the ACD report manually a hyphen will be displayed for the report prof...

Page 203: ...n 1 Configuration This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Configuration menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 203 ...

Page 204: ...nstall a new physical card to the PBX 1 Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right An image of the card will be displayed and information about the card will be shown 2 Click and drag the image of the card to the slot and release it The card will move into the slot space 3 Click OK to confirm To add new virtual cards to the PBX 1 Click on the name of the card to install at t...

Page 205: ...Standard SIP Phone For third party SIP Phones 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT32 Port Property Option Opens the Site Property Main screen 9 5 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Main To pre install PBXs connected to the STACK M card Before programming a legacy gateway it must be pre installed to enable the Legacy GW1 and Legacy GW2 shelf buttons 1 Install...

Page 206: ...tion 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type STACK M 9 28 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Legacy GW1 Legacy GW2 PRI23 SLC2 A combination card including 1 ISDN Primary Rate Interface port 23B channels 2 extension ports for SLTs STACK M Stacking Master Card for connecting PBXs as legacy gateways V IPEXT32 Virtual 32 Channel VoIP Extension Card 8 1 20 2 8 3 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 C...

Page 207: ...omponents for Legacy Gateways in the KX NS1000 Installation Manual Common Programming Reference Items When programming settings for cards extensions and other devices using Web Maintenance Console depending on the screen being accessed the following items may be listed on the screen for your reference Item Description Site Indicates the site number 1 16 of the PBX in the One look Network where the...

Page 208: ...the service cards installed in the slots of the physical shelf reference only Default Not stored Value Range Card Type SLC2 SLC2 card of an installed LCOT2 SLC2 or PRI23 SLC2 card LCOT2 LCOT2 card of an installed LCOT2 SLC2 card PRI23 PRI23 card of an installed PRI23 SLC2 card DOORPHONE DOORPHONE Card STACK M Stacking Master Card for connecting PBXs as legacy gateways Maintenance Console Location ...

Page 209: ...Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location 9 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Summary Programming Manual References 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Virtual Shelf The Site Shelf and Slot for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Slot Type Indicates the type of ...

Page 210: ...the card status reference only Default Current status Value Range INS The card is in service OUS The card is out of service Fault The card is not communicating with the network Pre Install A card has been added to the slot Maintenance Console Location 9 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Summary Programming Manual References 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Legacy Gateway 1 She...

Page 211: ...in service OUS The card is out of service Fault The card is not communicating with the network Pre Install A card has been added to the slot Maintenance Console Location 9 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Summary PC Programming Manual References 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Version Indicates the software version of the installed card reference only Default Current version...

Page 212: ...PC Programming Manual References 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot 212 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 9 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Summary ...

Page 213: ...connections can be used for multisite connection through IPsec VPN activation key In Number of activated IPSec VPN for MultiSite type the number of multisite connections to be used through IPsec VPN activation key and then click OK The remainder is the number of IPsec VPN that can be used through the another purpose to use the VPN connection You can click the Activation Key Installation link to ac...

Page 214: ...rietary Telephone P SIP Extension ch Activate IP PT SIP MLT P SIP SIP Extension ch Activate SIP Phone for 3rd party IP Conference Phone IP CS channel expansion CS unit IP CS channel expansion to 8ch One look Network Multi site connection with KX NS1000 PBXs QSIG Network QSIG Networking Built in Router Built in Router function IPsec VPN 16 sessions IP VPN IPsec for Built in Router Two way Recording...

Page 215: ... TSP annual license Poltys Number notice Dial Number Notification Poltys Number notice A L Dial Number Notification annual license Poltys CCAgent CCAgent With Internal CRM Poltys CCAgent A L CCAgent With Internal CRM annual license Poltys CCRecord Analog CCRecord Analog Extensions Trunks Poltys CCRecord Analog A L CCRecord Analog Extensions Trunks annual license Poltys CCRecord Digital CCRecord Di...

Page 216: ...tivation key files on the Storage Memory Card reference only Default Not applicable Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 9 3 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Activation Key Status System Total Indicates the total number of channels or CA users provided by activation keys in the One look network Default Not applicable Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Locatio...

Page 217: ...r or not to only use the G 711 codec for IP CO line calls Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property DSP CODEC Priority 1 value only others Specifies whether or not to only use the priority 1 codec set for the following types of calls IP extension calls SIP CO line calls Default Disable Value Range Enable Dis...

Page 218: ... CPU Usage Displays the system CPU s current processor load expressed as a percentage of total capacity reference only Default Not applicable Value Range 0 100 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Memory Usage Displays the amount of system memory currently being used displayed as a percentage of total capacity reference only Default Not applicab...

Page 219: ...and Value Range Inband Outband RFC2833 Outband H 245 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833 Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband RFC2833 Default 101 Value Range 96 127 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Syst...

Page 220: ...f two contiguous UDP ports to be used for Type 1 message communication between the Master unit and Slave units Default 4562 Value Range 1024 65534 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Multisite message UDP port number Specifies the UDP port to be used for Type 2 message communication between the Master unit and Slave units Note The UDP port spec...

Page 221: ...ween the Master unit and Slave units in Isolated mode Default 300 s Value Range 40 s 50 s 60 s 120 s 180 s 300 s 600 s 1800 s 3600 s 7200 s 10800 s Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Multisite startup monitoring time Specifies the amount of time in seconds required to pass before a PBX that loses its connection with the Master PBX switches to ...

Page 222: ... Signaling Model Specifies whether to carry out a call control H 225 process directly between the cards or through a gatekeeper Default Direct Value Range Direct GateKeeper Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Gatekeeper Connection Checking Interval 60s Specifies the time between periodic checks of connection to the gatekeeper Default 0 Value Ra...

Page 223: ...dth to Gatekeeper Specifies the used bandwidth information notified to the gatekeeper Default 10 kbps Value Range 1 255 kbps Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Primary Gatekeeper IP Address Specifies the IP address of the primary gatekeeper Default 192 168 1 3 Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configurati...

Page 224: ...aintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Secondary Gatekeeper Port Number Specifies the port number of the secondary gatekeeper Default 1719 Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property H 225 Port Number Specifies the port number for the H 225 protocol call control in an H 323 protocol ...

Page 225: ...n a QSIG network Default 1718 Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property QSIG Connectionless Tunneling UDP Port Number Specifies the UDP port number for connectionless tunneling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network Default 1717 Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Co...

Page 226: ...Configuration Slot System Property GW IP Address Specifies the IP address of the destination gateway device Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property GW Group Specifies the number of the gateway group to which the gateway entry belongs A maximum of 256 gateway groups can be created Default None V...

Page 227: ...onless tunneling between gateway devices at different locations in a QSIG network Default TCP Value Range TCP UDP Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Progress Tone Send Mode Specifies whether to send call progress tones to the destination When selecting External call progress tones are audible at the destination Default Internal Value Range Ext...

Page 228: ...ne 3rd None Value Range For 1st G 711A G 711Mu G 729A For 2nd and 3rd None G 711A G 711Mu G 729A Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Packet Sampling Time G 711A Specifies the time interval between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Default 20 ms Value ...

Page 229: ...ange 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property GW Settings Option 2 GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Voice Activity Detection for...

Page 230: ... bps 7200 bps 9600 bps 12000 bps 14400 bps Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature Since fax signals using a codec other than G 711 cannot be received accurately at the destination this feature automatically switches the codec to G 711 to enable end to end fax signal relay o...

Page 231: ...g this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband RFC2833 Default 101 Value Range 96 127 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property GW Settings Option 3 GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 ...

Page 232: ...38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for T 30 messages Specifies the redundancy count for T 30 messages when using the T 38 protocol Default 3 Value Range 0 7 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T 38 protocol Default 0 Value Range 0 3 Maintenance Console Loc...

Page 233: ... Value Range Max 30 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Remaining Number of Digits Specifies the number of digits to be dialed following the leading number to access the destination Default 29 Value Range 0 29 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property GW No GW Group Select...

Page 234: ...lue Range 1 256 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property GW No Specifies the number of the destination gateway device This setting is only available when GW No GW Group Selection on this screen is set to GW No Default 1 Value Range 1 512 Maintenance Console Location 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property 234 PC Programming Manu...

Page 235: ...enance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Multisite Connection Ability Specifies whether the PBX may connect to other PBX sites as part of a One look network Default Enable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Isolated Mode Specifies whether the PBX will continue to operate in Iso...

Page 236: ... Auto Recovery Specifies whether a Slave unit in Isolated mode automatically switches to Normal mode when the Master unit recovers Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 3 1 1 Backup Master Mode and Isolated Mode Switch Time Service to Break in Isolated Mode Specifies whether to se...

Page 237: ...group of the site Default 1 Value Range 1 256 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 15 1 5 Peer to Peer P2P Connection P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer to peer group s name reference only Default Not stored Value Range P2P Group Name Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site P...

Page 238: ... Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Installation Manual References 5 4 1 Easy Setup Wizard IP CS Registration Mode Specifies the registration mode for registering IP CSs to the PBX Default Full Automatic Value Range Manual Full Automatic Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property SIP over TCP IP V SIP...

Page 239: ...ies how many IP PTs connected to the mother board can send out BGM Default 4 Value Range 0 117 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 3 1 2 BGM Background Music Echo Cancellation Ports Specifies the number of ports to be used for echo cancellation Default 32 Value Range 0 64 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuratio...

Page 240: ... Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property P2P Group Jitter Compensation Operation for G 711 FAX Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for fax communications using the G 711 codec Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Jitter Compensation Oper...

Page 241: ...ions Default 200 ms Value Range 0 200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Init for Voice Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for voice communications Default 20 ms Value Range 0 200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for Voic...

Page 242: ...Delay Max for FAX Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications Default 50 ms Value Range 0 200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Init for FAX Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for fax communications Default 50 ms Value Range 0 200 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuratio...

Page 243: ... 45 12 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property DTMF Detection Level for G 711Mu Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G 711Mu codec Default 23 dB Value Range 39 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 ON Specifies the length of time that the PBX det...

Page 244: ... the fax operation Default 1 Value Range 1 3 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation Default OFF Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property CED Signal Fixation ...

Page 245: ...n Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until another CNG signal is detected for SIP extensions Default 3000 ms Value Range 20 n n 1 250 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter SIP Extension Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation for SI...

Page 246: ...n n 1 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property T38 FAX Transmit Level Network to PBX A Law Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T 38 protocol packets when the codec used is G 711A Default 8 dB Value Range 13 2 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property T38 ...

Page 247: ...ransmit Level Mu Law SIP Extension Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T 38 protocol packets when the codec used is G 711Mu for SIP extensions Default 2 dB Value Range 7 8 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property VoIP DSP Options 2 The settings in this tab relate to communications within a One look network ...

Page 248: ...l Gain for the up voice path Default 3 db Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain Default 3 db Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property NLP Setting Specifies the NLP Non Linear Processor setting to control echo sound qualit...

Page 249: ...e Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Jitter Compensation Operation for G 729A Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for communications using the G 729A codec Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Jitter Buffer Delay Min for Voice Specifies the minimum size of the jitter...

Page 250: ...tenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for Voice Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for voice communications Default 1800 ms Value Range 1000 65530 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Packet Sampling Time G 711A Specifies the time interval ...

Page 251: ...s samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Default 20 ms Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Port Number Voice RTP UDP Port No Server Specifies the UDP port used by the system to transmit and receive RTP Real time Transfer Protocol...

Page 252: ...024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone UDP Port No for SIP Extension Server Specifies the UDP port number used for the SIP Extension server To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Default 5060 Value Range 1024 65535 Maintenance Conso...

Page 253: ...re Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection Data Transmission Protocol HTTP Port No for SIP MLT Specifies the HTTP port of the PBX side ACS for data communication with KX UT series SIP phones Default 7580 Value Range 0 65535 Setting 0 will close port access for this feature Maintenance Console ...

Page 254: ...Specifies the IP PT IP CS firmware update port number Default 31021 Value Range 0 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property LOGIN Port Number Specifies the port number used to login to the PBX via the LAN Default 33321 Value Range 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property CTI Port Number Sp...

Page 255: ... PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 9 Built in Communication Assistant 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 9 Built in Communication Assistant Feature Manual References 4 1 1 CA Communication Assistant LAN Status LINK for Main Port Indicates the current connection status of the main port reference only Default ...

Page 256: ... 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection IP Extension IP CS NAT MGCP Server Port No Specifies the outside facing MGCP port of the PBX side network gateway for remote connections Default 2727 Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot S...

Page 257: ...nsions Default Blank UDP Value Range Blank UDP None Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection IP Extension IP CS Keep Alive Packet Type for IP CS Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out for remote connections for IP CS KX NS0154 only Default Blank UDP Value Range Blank UDP None M...

Page 258: ...CS KX NS0154 only Default 31021 Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property SIP Extension UT Extension NAT SIP Proxy Server Port No Specifies the outside facing port of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy server Default 0 Value Range 1 65535 except 50xx and x50xx Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Config...

Page 259: ...547 Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension NAT CWMP Server HTTP Port No for Network Survivability Specifies the outside facing HTTP port of the PBX side network gateway for remote connections This setting specifies the port number used for the secondary server...

Page 260: ...LT Data Download Server HTTP Port No Specifies the outside facing HTTP port of the PBX side network gateway for remote connections used for downloading data to KX UT series SIP phones Default 7580 Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension NAT SIP MLT Data Downloa...

Page 261: ...1 1 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension Keep Alive Packet Type Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out for remote connections Default Blank UDP Value Range Register Blank UDP None Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time s S...

Page 262: ...8 1 1 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension PERIODIC Ability Specifies whether alive monitoring is performed for connected remote extensions Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection UT Extension PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time s Specifies the poll...

Page 263: ...ifies the outside facing IP address or host name of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy server If using a separate IP address from Common NAT External IP Address configure this setting Default Blank Value Range Blank 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection Op...

Page 264: ... 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection Option NAT NTP Server IP Address Specifies the outside facing IP address of the network gateway connected to the NTP server If using a separate IP address from Common NAT External IP Address configure this setting Default Blank Value Range Blank...

Page 265: ...mation on the location of SIP Extensions Default 300 s Value Range 10 3600 s Maintenance Console Location 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT32 Card Property Feature Manual References 18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension SIP Location Hold Time Interval Specifies the interval time that the PBX waits before starting to hold information on location of SIP Extensions Def...

Page 266: ... Server IP Address Specifies the outside facing IP address or host name of the PBX side network gateway for remote connections Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 IP address Max 100 characters host name Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to R...

Page 267: ...SIP MLT NAT SIP MLT Data Download Server HTTP Port No Specifies the outside facing HTTP port of the PBX side network gateway for remote connections used for downloading data to KX UT series SIP phones Default 7580 Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters a...

Page 268: ...aracters host name Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP MLT NAT SIP Proxy Server Port No Specifies the outside facing port of the network gateway connected to the SIP proxy server Default 0 Value Range 1 65535 except 50xx and x50xx Maintenance Conso...

Page 269: ...ort No Specifies the outside facing port of the network gateway connected to the NTP server Default 123 Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP MLT NAT Keep Alive Packet Type Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out f...

Page 270: ...nsole Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP MLT NAT SIP Register Expire Time s Specifies the length of time that will elapse before the current registration expires Note This setting is available only when NAT Keep Alive Packet Type is set to Register Default 20 s Value...

Page 271: ... HTTP Port No Specifies the outside facing HTTP port of the PBX side network gateway for remote connections that is used when the gateway specified in Setting parameters assigned to Remote SIP MLT is not available Default 7547 Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection Setting...

Page 272: ...ces 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection Control Condition of Remote SIP MLT PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time s Specifies the polling interval for alive monitoring when PERIODIC Ability is set to Enable Default 30 s Value Range 30 3600 s Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection Echo Cancellatio...

Page 273: ...iguration Slot Site Property DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Default 3db Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain Default 0 db Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Document Versio...

Page 274: ...s are used Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property DSP Digital Gain Up on V IPEXT side for conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using an extension of a V IPEXT card Default 2 dB Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property DSP Digital Gain U...

Page 275: ...or conference Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path for conference calls using a gateway between sites Default 0 dB Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Echo Cancellation Ability on TDM side for conference Specifies the echo canceller ability time for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication Default 64 m...

Page 276: ...ange 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property EC Gain on TDM side for conference Specifies the error correction gain for conferencing using TDM circuit mode communication Default 3 db Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property NLP Setting on TDM side for conference Specifies the ...

Page 277: ...aintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 277 9 5 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Main ...

Page 278: ...ndicates the version of the FAX Card firmware reference only Default Not applicable Value Range Version Number Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property FAX Extension number Specifies the extension number assigned to the FAX Card for making and receiving faxes directly from the PBX Default 5103 Value Range Extension number Maintenance Console Location ...

Page 279: ...y DSP Digital Gain Down Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path Default 0 db Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Default 3 db Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property EC Gai...

Page 280: ...ility feature Since fax signals using a codec other than G 711 cannot be received accurately at the destination this feature automatically switches the codec to G 711 to enable end to end fax signal relay over the network Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 ON Specif...

Page 281: ... before the PBX proceeds the fax operation Default 2 Value Range 1 3 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation Default ON Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Proper...

Page 282: ... Specifies whether the system will detect the end of a call when there is a unique cyclic tone Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Maximum Cyclic Tone Time Specifies the length of time of a continuing cyclic tone that the PBX will detect as the end of a call Default 6000 ms Value Range 1000 60000 ms Main...

Page 283: ...Card Property DSP Digital Gain Down Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path Default 0 db Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 6 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Card Property DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Default 3 db Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 6 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Ca...

Page 284: ... of the FAX Detection Ability feature Since fax signals using a codec other than G 711 cannot be received accurately at the destination this feature automatically switches the codec to G 711 to enable end to end fax signal relay over the network Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 6 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Card Property CNG Signal Effective ...

Page 285: ...ounter Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation Default 2 Value Range 1 3 Maintenance Console Location 9 6 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Card Property CNG Signal Fixation Detection Pattern Specifies whether or not the Unified Messaging system will respond to CNG signals Default ON Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Lo...

Page 286: ...figuration Slot UM Port Property Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default 1 2 INS 3 24 OUS Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Locati...

Page 287: ...roup Default 1 Voicemail 1 Value Range 1 16 Maintenance Console Location 9 7 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Port Property Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 287 9 7 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Port Property ...

Page 288: ...eries KX T7600 series APT SLT DSS Console UM VM Other CS High density CS IP CS SIP CS S PS Maintenance Console Location 9 8 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property Port Type View PC Programming Manual References 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Total Count Indicates the total number of each type of telephone device and CS connected to the PBX reference only CSs are count...

Page 289: ...24 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 9 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property NAT Traversal Specifies the NAT traversal method STUN A STUN Server used alongside the SIP Server finds out the global IP address of the router with NAT enabled Fixed IP Addr The global IP address of the router with NAT enabled is fixed Note Manual programming is optional except when programmi...

Page 290: ... Maintenance Console Location 9 9 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property NAT Keep Alive Packet Type Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be sent out Default Blank UDP Value Range Blank UDP None Maintenance Console Location 9 9 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property NAT Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Specifies the interval time until the ...

Page 291: ...PGW Shelf Property STUN Ability Specifies whether to open a protocol port of the STUN server to enable STUN feature Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 9 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property STUN Client Port Number Specifies the port number of the PBX used for communications with the STUN server Default 33478 Value Range 1 65535 Main...

Page 292: ...y Number Check Ability Specifies whether to receive a SIP CO line call when receiving the INVITE message with an incorrect target SIP URI The setting specified here is also applied when the request header is blank or contains characters that cannot be modified to a receivable number Default Disable High Low Value Range Disable High Low Disable Low High Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 9 PBX C...

Page 293: ...enance Console Location 9 9 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property 100rel Ability Specifies whether to add the option tag 100rel to the header field of the INVITE message Default Enable Passive Value Range Disable This feature is not activated Enable Active Activates this feature only if the other device supports the feature Enable Passive Activates this feature only when ...

Page 294: ...P QoS Ability Default 0 Value Range 0 7 Maintenance Console Location 9 9 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property SIP QoS ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when ToS is selected in SIP QoS Ability Default Normal Value Range Normal Monetary Cost Reliability Throughput Delay Maintenance Console Location 9 9 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf P...

Page 295: ...Specifies the retransmission interval time for INVITE responses and non INVITE requests Default 40 Value Range 40 255 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 9 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 295 9 9 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property ...

Page 296: ... whether to request that the DNS server translates domain names into IP addresses using the DNS SRV record Click Common Settings to change this setting Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Card Property 296 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 9 10 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Card...

Page 297: ... displayed in the list 2 From the Provider menu select the desired SIP provider 3 Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers to be assigned to the SIP provider selected in step 2 4 Click Execute 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply Appropriate setting values designated by the SIP provider will be set in the parameters for the virtual SIP gateway p...

Page 298: ... and the following settings are implemented Provider Name and SIP Server IP Address in the Main tab will be set to match the selected Trunk Adaptor The User Name and Authentication ID in the Account tab will be set to the value specified in SIP Account User Name increased by 1 for each connection i e if 401 was specified User Name and Authentication ID for No 1 will be set to 401 and then for No 2...

Page 299: ...n 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Channel Attribute Specifies the channel property of each port to enable several sessions to be performed for one subscription with the SIP provider Default Not Used Value Range Basic channel The subscriber channel that is assigned the SIP registration information Additional channel for SlotN N 1 4 ChN N 1 16 The subordinate channel that uses the same ...

Page 300: ...ration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property SIP Server Name Specifies the domain name of the SIP proxy server Note Specify the domain name of the outbound proxy server if provided by the SIP provider Default Not stored Value Range Max 100 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Installation Manual References 8 6 5 DNS Clie...

Page 301: ...s set to INS Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property SIP Server Port Number Specifies the port number of the SIP proxy server Default 5060 Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property SIP Service Domain Specifies the...

Page 302: ...unit PBX when the Master unit PBX fails Default Normal Value Range Normal Backup Note The Backup setting is only effective when the site the card is installed in is designated as the Master Backup unit Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property PC Programming Manual References 1 2 3 1 One look Networking Survivability Feature Manual References ...

Page 303: ...IPGW Port Property PC Programming Manual References 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Main P2P Group Feature Manual References 15 1 5 Peer to Peer P2P Connection Account The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Connection Indicates the port statu...

Page 304: ...ce Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Authentication ID Specifies the authentication ID required for registration with the SIP server Default Not stored Value Range Max 64 characters The available characters are those allowed in RFC3986 0 9 a z A Z _ Other characters are not allowed Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configurat...

Page 305: ...t click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default INS Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Register Ability Specifies whether to send ...

Page 306: ... Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Registrar Server Name Specifies the domain name of the SIP server Default Not stored Value Range Max 100 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Installation Manual References 8 6 5 DNS Client Registrar Server IP ...

Page 307: ... to INS Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Registrar Server Port Number Specifies the port number of the SIP server Default 5060 Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Register Resending Interval s Specifi...

Page 308: ...e port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property STUN Server Name Specifies the domain name of a STUN server Default Not stored Value Range Max 100 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Installation Manua...

Page 309: ... Configuration Slot Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default INS Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration ...

Page 310: ...tenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Session Refresh Method Specifies the type of request that the PBX sends to periodically refresh SIP sessions Default re INVITE Value Range UPDATE re INVITE Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Session Incoming Refresher Request Specifies the type ...

Page 311: ...0 255 s Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Proxy Require Option Specifies option tags in a Proxy Require header field so that the SIP server is notified that the client is behind a router with NAT enabled and firewall Default Not stored Value Range Max 100 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration ...

Page 312: ... Party The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default INS Value Range INS Th...

Page 313: ...ress of the From header The configuration in From Header User Part will be invalid if this parameter is set Default Not stored Value Range Max 100 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property P Preferred Identity Header User Part Specifies the value to be stored in the username part of the SIP URI of the P Preferred Identity header Def...

Page 314: ...Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Remove Digit Specifies the number of leading digits of the CLIP number to be removed This setting is compulsory when PBX CLIP is selected in From Header User Part or P Preferred Identity Header User Part Default 0 Value Range 0 32 Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Additional Di...

Page 315: ... will be displayed as Anonymous Example From Anonymous sip 1234 example com Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property P Asserted Identity header Select whether to include a P Asserted Identity header with caller information This header will be sent independent of the selection for Header Type From Header P Preferred Identity Header Default Dis...

Page 316: ...ith the network Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Number Format Specifies the format of an incoming call number Default National Value Range International International National Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Type Specifies the header of the incoming SIP message in which...

Page 317: ...ies additional digits to be inserted before the dialed number of an incoming call from an E 164 enabled mobile device Default Not stored Value Range Max 7 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Voice FAX The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Ref...

Page 318: ...nfiguration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Packet Sampling Time G 711A Specifies the time interval between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Default 20 ms Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Packet Sampling...

Page 319: ...c This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Informed Annex B Status G 729A Specifies whether to inform that Annex B for the G 729 codec is not supported Defa...

Page 320: ... 14400 bps Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature This feature enables end to end fax signal relay when the other party prefers a codec other than G 711 This feature functions only if the other party supports G 711 Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenanc...

Page 321: ...ogramming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default Current status Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with...

Page 322: ...e Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field Default Normal Value Range Normal Monetary Cost Reliability Throughput Delay Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property RTP QoS DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ Default Not stored Value Range 0 63 Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot ...

Page 323: ... 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property RTCP Packet Interval Specifies the interval time until the next RTCP packet is sent Default 5 s Value Range 5 60 s Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Keep Alive Timer Specifies the length of time to send Keep Alive packets for the connection Specifying 0 s will disable the sending of Keep Al...

Page 324: ...S The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property T38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T 38 protocol Default 512 Value Range 272 512 Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V...

Page 325: ...g the T 38 protocol Default 0 Value Range 0 3 Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T 38 protocol Default Transferred TCF Value Range Transferred TCF Local TCF Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property R...

Page 326: ...X Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default Current status Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Lo...

Page 327: ...e T 38 protocol Default Normal Value Range Normal Monetary Cost Reliability Throughput Delay Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property T38 FAX QoS DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ when using the T 38 protocol This setting is compulsory when DSCP is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available Default Not stored Value Range...

Page 328: ...esired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default Current status Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo can...

Page 329: ... the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Note For KX NT500 series phones in place of this setting the setting for DSP Digital Gain Up in 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Card Property Main is applied Default 6 dB Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain No...

Page 330: ...rogramming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default Current status Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating wit...

Page 331: ...es Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property CNIP Send Specifies whether to send the caller s name to be displayed on the called party s telephone when making a SIP CO line call Default Yes Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property CNIP Receive Specifi...

Page 332: ...Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Attended Transfer REFER Specifies whether to allow attended transfers using REFER Default No Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property 332 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Sl...

Page 333: ... IPGW16 Shelf Property RTCP Packet Sending Ability Specifies whether to enable the PBX to send RTCP packets Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property RTCP Packet Interval Specifies the length of time until the PBX retries to send RTCP packets when no reply is received Default 5 s Value Range 5 60 s M...

Page 334: ...ole Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property RTP QoS ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field Default Normal Value Range Normal Monetary Cost Reliability Throughput Delay Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property RTP QoS DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ Default 0 V...

Page 335: ...ng the T 38 protocol Default ToS Value Range ToS DSCP HEX Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property T38 FAX QoS ToS Priority Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when using the T 38 protocol Default 0 Value Range 0 7 Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property T38 FAX QoS ToS Ty...

Page 336: ...6 Shelf Property T38 FAX QoS HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a hexadecimal number when using the T 38 protocol This setting is compulsory when HEX is selected in T38 FAX QoS Available Default 00 Value Range 00 FF Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time Default 64 ...

Page 337: ...Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Default 6 dB Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain Default 6 dB Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configurati...

Page 338: ... destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network Default Yes Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property Feature Manual References 15 1 21 Private Network Features QSIG CT Call Transfer QSIG CF Enables a call to be forwarded to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network Default Yes Value Range No Yes Mai...

Page 339: ...ter seizing a virtual IP CO line Default 20 s Value Range 5 30 s Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property Inter digit Timer T302 2 Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a dial number must be dialed Default 5 s Value Range 1 10 s Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shel...

Page 340: ...nance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property Voice Codec Priority 1st Specifies the highest priority codec type For fax communications it is necessary to specify G 711A or G 711Mu for this parameter Default G 711A Value Range G 711A G 711Mu G 729A Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property Voice...

Page 341: ...0 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property Packet Sampling Time for G 711Mu Specifies the time interval between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Default 20 ms Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Conf...

Page 342: ...Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property Programming Manual References 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property Incoming Call Voice Codec Priority 1st FAX Sending Method Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal Default G 711 Inband Value Range G 711 Inband T 38 Maintenance Console Location 9 12...

Page 343: ...ad Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833 Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband RFC2833 Default 101 Value Range 96 127 Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property T38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when using the T 38 protocol Default 512 Value Range 272 512 Maintenan...

Page 344: ... 7 Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property T38 FAX UDPTL Redundancy count for data Specifies the redundancy count for data when using the T 38 protocol Default 0 Value Range 0 3 Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management met...

Page 345: ...erlap receiving Default 150 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP call setting message Default 60 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property T304 ...

Page 346: ...s the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message Default 40 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property T309 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect the data link before disconnecting the call Default 120 Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Loc...

Page 347: ...00 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message Default 0 Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a re...

Page 348: ...tus enquiry message Default 40 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property T3D3 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to establish L2 in Permanent mode Default 50 Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property T3D9 Specifies ...

Page 349: ... ms Maintenance Console Location 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 349 9 12 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property ...

Page 350: ...Maintenance Console Location 9 12 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property GK Settings Device Name Specifies the name of the device for programming reference Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 12 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Shelf Property GK Settings 350 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 9 1...

Page 351: ... 8 No 9 9 No 10 0 No 11 48 Not stored Value Range Max 30 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 9 12 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Hunt Pattern Call Distribution Port Group 1st 16th Specifies the number of the call distribution port group to which incoming calls are directed in priority Default 1st CDPG 1 2nd 16th None Value Range For 1...

Page 352: ...tion Slot V IPGW16 Port Property Call Distribution Port Group Feature Manual References 4 1 2 Call Distribution Port Group 352 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 9 12 2 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Shelf Property Virtual IP Gateway Hunt Pattern ...

Page 353: ...k Adaptor s Web Maintenance Console will open in a new browser window For details about the Trunk Adaptor s Web Maintenance Console refer to the documentation of the Trunk Adaptor 6 Click OK Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default Current ...

Page 354: ... Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Port Property Feature Manual References 4 1 2 Call Distribution Port Group Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 13 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Port Property 354 PC Programming Manual...

Page 355: ... PT IP Proprietary Telephone Signaling MGCP UDP Port No Server Specifies the UDP port used by the V IPEXT card to transmit and receive MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol data This must be changed if another network application is using the same port To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Default 2727 Value Range 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9...

Page 356: ...ed for debugging purposes and IP PTs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances Do not use debugging settings unless instructed to do so To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Default 20 s Value Range Disable 10 120 s Maintenance Console Location 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Card Property Feature Manual Re...

Page 357: ...ary Telephone First Resending Time MGCP Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol data To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Default 500 ms Value Range 500 n n 1 8 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Card Property Feature Manual Refere...

Page 358: ...ion 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Card Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone DSP Digital Gain Down Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path Default 7 dB Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Card Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprieta...

Page 359: ...ocation 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Card Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone NLP Setting Specifies the NLP Non Linear Processor setting to control echo sound quality Default Weak Value Range Disable Weak Normal Strong Maintenance Console Location 9 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Card Property Feature Manual Re...

Page 360: ...d names are displayed on the left 3 Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for registration Click Next 4 Click Next 5 If the registration is still in progress the dialog box will show Registration Executing If the registration is successful the dialog box will show Registration Completed Click Close Once the IP PT is successfully registered the status of the IP PT wil...

Page 361: ...Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Note Settings for ports that have been set as secondary ports for IP extensions in the Secondary Setting tab cannot be changed on this screen Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configurati...

Page 362: ...n Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone Status Indicates whether a certain IP PT is registered reference only Default None Value Range None Registered Maintenance Console Location 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone IP Phone Registration ID MAC ...

Page 363: ...figuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone Program Ver Indicates the program software file version of the IP PT reference only Default Not applicable Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP P...

Page 364: ...onsole Location 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property Programming Manual References 9 5 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Main P2P Group Feature Manual References 15 1 5 Peer to Peer P2P Connection Option The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configura...

Page 365: ...T IP Proprietary Telephone Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default Current status Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 15 ...

Page 366: ... setting is available only for telephones that support both EHS headsets and waiting tone path switching KX NT556 KX NT553 only Default PT Tone Value Range PT Tone Headset Maintenance Console Location 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 4 1 12 Call Waiting Tone Ringing Tone Selects the dual tone switching pattern of the ring tone for inco...

Page 367: ...Location 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone Packet Sampling Time G 711 G 722 Specifies the time interval between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Default 20 ms Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 60 ms Maintena...

Page 368: ... address at each terminal Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone Voice The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configurat...

Page 369: ...onsole Location 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default Current status Value Range INS The port is in se...

Page 370: ...guration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone Secondary Setting The settings on this screen are for programming the Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX feature for use among IP extensions in a networked environment For details and conditions regarding the use of this feature refer to 2 1 7 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary ...

Page 371: ... where you want to designate secondary ports Removing Secondary Port Settings Follow the steps below to remove secondary port settings for IP extensions 1 Click Remove Secondary A dialog box will appear 2 Primary ports of extensions that have secondary ports assigned are displayed on the left Select the extensions whose secondary setting you want to remove and then click the right arrow 3 Click Ex...

Page 372: ...nd then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default Current status Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone Prima...

Page 373: ...enance Console Location 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 2 1 7 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX Pair Slot Indicates the number of the virtual card slot in the site where the assigned secondary port is located reference only Note A value will be displayed here only after the Set Secondary command has been executed see above Default ...

Page 374: ... displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port Note This setting cannot be changed on this screen until the port has been assigned as a secondary port using the Set Secondary command See Setting Secondary Ports above for details Default Starting at 101 Value...

Page 375: ... then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default Fault Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone Phone Location S...

Page 376: ...figuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone 376 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property ...

Page 377: ...PEXT32 Card Property Feature Manual References 18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension DSP Digital Gain Down Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path Default 0 dB Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT32 Card Property Feature Manual References 18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension DSP Digital Gain Up...

Page 378: ...EXT32 Card Property Feature Manual References 18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension NLP Setting Specifies the NLP Non Linear Processor setting to control echo sound quality Default Weak Value Range Disable Weak Normal Strong Maintenance Console Location 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT32 Card Property Feature Manual References 18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol...

Page 379: ...s 18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Password Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX While it is possible to enter a password manually for each SIP Extension you can copy Extension Number to Password by clicking the Copy to button This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS and the programmer must be in On line...

Page 380: ...18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the SIP Extension reference only Default Current IP address Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension P2P Group Specifies the p...

Page 381: ... Site Property Main Main P2P Group 11 10 PBX Configuration 3 10 Group P2P Group Feature Manual References 15 1 5 Peer to Peer P2P Connection MWI Method Selects the method of receiving Message Waiting Indications for SIP extensions Default Unsolicited Value Range Standard Unsolicited Note If Standard is selected a maximum of 64 SIP extensions can be used Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Config...

Page 382: ...r each SIP Extension you can copy the value for Extension Number to Password by clicking the Copy to button This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS and the programmer must be in On line mode Default Not stored Value Range 4 16 characters consisting of 0 9 a z A Z Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT32 Port...

Page 383: ...PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Packet Sampling Time G 711 G 722 Specifies the time interval between measurements samples of sound data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Default 20 ms Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maint...

Page 384: ...xtension Number Specifies the extension number of the port Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Password Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX While it is possibl...

Page 385: ...with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Phone Location Specifies the type of extension connected to the port Default Local Value Range Local The extension is located on the same network as the PBX standard configuration Remote MRG The extension is ...

Page 386: ...or each SIP Extension you can copy the value for Extension Number to Password by clicking the Copy to button This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS and the programmer must be in On line mode Default Not stored Value Range 4 16 characters consisting of 0 9 a z A Z Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT32 Por...

Page 387: ...able Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension FAX Sending Method Specifies the method of transporting the fax signal Default G 711 Inband Value Range G 711 Inband T 38 Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT32 Port ...

Page 388: ...e Range 272 512 Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction Redundancy Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T 38 protocol Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configu...

Page 389: ... Value Range 0 3 Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T 38 protocol Default Transferred TCF Value Range Transferred TCF Local TCF Maintenance Console Location 9 17 PBX Configurati...

Page 390: ...pecifies the UDP port used by the V IPCS card to transmit and receive MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol data This must be changed if another network application is using the same port To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Default 32727 Value Range 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 9 18 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Card Proper...

Page 391: ...rom an IP CS for the duration specified here the PBX considers the IP CS to be unreachable and sets the port status to Fault During operation set between 10 s and 60 s Settings over 60 s and Disable are used for debugging purposes and IP CSs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances Do not use debugging settings unless instructed to do so To change the value displayed here c...

Page 392: ...rting to resend MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol data To change the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Default 500 ms Value Range 500 n n 1 8 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 18 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Card Property Resending Time Out MGCP Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending MGCP Media Gateway Control ...

Page 393: ...the value displayed here click Common Settings and set the desired value Default Normal Value Range Normal Optional Maintenance Console Location 9 18 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Card Property Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 393 9 18 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Card Property ...

Page 394: ...ghlight IP CSs and click the right arrow to select them for registration Click Next 4 If the registration is still in progress the dialog box will show Registration Executing If the registration is successful the dialog box will show Registration Completed Click Close Once the IP CS is successfully registered the status of the IP CS will update to show Registered De registration Follow the steps b...

Page 395: ... port Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Port Property Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default Current status Value Range INS The port is in s...

Page 396: ...r IP CSs hyphen Value Range For KX NS0154 Yes No For other IP CSs hyphen Maintenance Console Location 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Port Property MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the IP CS reference only Default Not applicable Value Range 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF Maintenance Console Location 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Port Prope...

Page 397: ...ntenance Console Location 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Port Property Programming Manual References 19 2 1 PBX Configuration 11 2 1 Maintenance CS Synchronization Air Synchronization LAN Sync Group No Specifies the LAN sync group number when using an IP CS KX NS0154 only in a LAN sync group A maximum of 64 IP CSs can be assigned to one group This setting is available only i...

Page 398: ...nfiguration Slot V IPCS4 Port Property Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default Current status Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Lo...

Page 399: ...conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Default 20 ms Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 50 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Port Property Voice Activity Detection for G 711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G 711 codec This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silen...

Page 400: ... is set for MAC Address on the Main tab cannot be set to Secondary here 2 Access the port property screen of the site where primary ports will be assigned secondary ports 3 Click Set Secondary A dialog box will appear 4 From the drop down list select a site where secondary ports will be assigned Note The number displayed for Available ports indicates the maximum number of available ports at the se...

Page 401: ... in On line mode Default Fault Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Port Property Primary Secondary Specifies the designation of the port as a primary port or secondary port Note If an IP CS has been registered to the port this set...

Page 402: ...ot Indicates the slot number of the assigned secondary port reference only Note A value will be displayed here only after the Set Secondary command has been executed see above Default Not stored Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Port Property Feature Manual References 2 1 7 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX Pair Port Indic...

Page 403: ...Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Port Property Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port This option is only available in On line mode Default Fault Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of serv...

Page 404: ...n the same network as the PBX standard configuration Remote MRG The IP CS is accessing the PBX remotely use Media Relay Gateway Maintenance Console Location 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Port Property Feature Manual References 10 1 16 IP CS KX NS0154 404 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Port Property ...

Page 405: ... 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Card Property DSP Digital Gain Down Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path Default 0 dB Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Card Property DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Default 6 dB Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 9 20 PBX...

Page 406: ...iguration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Card Property PERIODIC Inform Specifies whether alive monitoring is performed for connected extensions Default Enable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Card Property PERIODIC Inform Interval Specifies the polling interval for alive monitoring when PERIODIC Inform is set to Enabl...

Page 407: ...imes Maintenance Console Location 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Card Property NTP Query Interval Specifies the interval at which connected extensions poll the specified NTP server for a time update Default 12 h Value Range 1 24 hours Maintenance Console Location 9 20 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Card Property Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming M...

Page 408: ...numbers and names are displayed on the left 3 Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for registration Click Next 4 Click Next 5 If the registration is still in progress the dialog box will show Registration Executing If the registration is successful the dialog box will show Registration Completed Click Close Once the device is successfully registered the status of th...

Page 409: ...ference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Note Settings for ports that have been set as secondary ports for IP extensions in the Secondary Setting tab cannot be changed on this screen Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration...

Page 410: ... Port Property Feature Manual References 18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Password Specifies the password used for registering a SIP phone to the PBX This parameter can only be modified when the virtual SIP extension port is set to OUS Default 1234 Value Range 4 16 characters consisting of 0 9 a z A Z Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEX...

Page 411: ...1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 18 1 2 SIP Session Initiation Protocol Extension Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the SIP phone reference only Default Current IP address Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Port Property Feature Manu...

Page 412: ...figuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Port Property Programming Manual References 11 10 PBX Configuration 3 10 Group P2P Group Feature Manual References 15 1 5 Peer to Peer P2P Connection P2P Group Name Indicates the selected peer to peer group s name reference only Default Not stored Value Range P2P Group Name Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEX...

Page 413: ...21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Port Property Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Port Property Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS o...

Page 414: ...ences 9 4 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot System Property Main System Speed Dial Download For UT Extensions SIP QoS DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ Default 0 Value Range 0 63 Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Port Property RTP QoS DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for DiffServ Default 0 V...

Page 415: ... this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound Default 20 ms Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Port Property Jitter Buffer Maximum Delay Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications Default 20 Value Range 3 50 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configur...

Page 416: ...omatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX feature for use among IP extensions in a networked environment For details and conditions regarding the use of this feature refer to 2 1 7 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX in the Feature Manual Setting Secondary Ports Follow the steps below to designate secondary ports for IP extensions 1 Specify the secondary ports a Access the port property screen of the sit...

Page 417: ...ve secondary ports assigned are displayed on the left Select the extensions whose secondary setting you want to remove and then click the right arrow 3 Click Execute A message confirming the setting removal will be displayed The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Exten...

Page 418: ...on 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Port Property Primary Secondary Specifies the designation of the port as a primary port or secondary port Note If an extension has been registered to the port this setting cannot be changed from Primary to Secondary De register the port to change this setting Default Primary Value Range Primary Secondary Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Co...

Page 419: ...ue will be displayed here only after the Set Secondary command has been executed see above Default Not applicable Value Range Virtual slot number Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 2 1 7 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX Pair Port Indicates the port number of the assigned secondary port reference only Note...

Page 420: ...on 1 1 Configuration Slot Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Port Property Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Confi...

Page 421: ...Gateway Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection Web MC Ability Specifies whether the Web programming is allowed on the KX UT series SIP phone connected to the port by enabling the Web port setting on the phone s menu For details about Web programming for KX UT series SIP phones refe...

Page 422: ... selected but the total number of HTTPS connections available at the site will be exceeded by changing this setting a warning message will be displayed and the setting change will be canceled Maintenance Console Location 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 18 1 1 Simple Remote Connection 422 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 ...

Page 423: ...e dial sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognize it as an off hook signal Default 160 ms Value Range 8 n n 3 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 22 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot SLC2 Card Property SLT Off Hook Guard Time Specifies the length of guard time used for off hook signals from SLTs to prevent the PBX mistaking them for pulse dials Default 504 ms Value Range 8 n n 12 6...

Page 424: ...tion Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal sent when an SLT user presses the hookswitch or the Flash Recall button Default Enable Value Range Disable The PBX disconnects the line to prevent placing the call on hold Enable The PBX places the call on consultation hold Maintenance Console Location 9 22 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot SLC2 Card Property Feature Manual References 4 1 9 Ca...

Page 425: ...Property DTMF R STD Detection Time Specifies the minimum length that a DTMF tone must be for the PBX to recognize it as a DTMF tone Default 30 ms Value Range 2 n n 1 31 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 22 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot SLC2 Card Property Hook Threshold PD A law Specifies the current threshold A law for switching from Power Save mode to an active state Please consult you...

Page 426: ...tching from Power Save mode to an active state Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information Default Not stored Value Range 1 5 4 0 mA Maintenance Console Location 9 22 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot SLC2 Card Property 426 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 9 22 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot SLC2 Card Property ...

Page 427: ...gacy gateway PBX For information about legacy gateways see 9 28 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Legacy GW1 Legacy GW2 Port Type Indicates the port type reference only Default SLT Value Range SLT SLT port SLC Maintenance Console Location 9 23 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot SLC2 Port Property Telephone Type Indicates the connected telephone type reference only Default SLT Value Ra...

Page 428: ...f the port Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 9 23 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot SLC2 Port Property Programming Manual References None Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 9 23 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot SLC2 Port Pro...

Page 429: ...ne company This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly Default 1 s Value Range 0 5 n n 1 16 s Maintenance Console Location 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type CO Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not For outgoing CO line calls audible tones can be heard as the dialed number is se...

Page 430: ...t Default 6 s Value Range 1 0 s 15 0 s Maintenance Console Location 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type Pulse DTMF Dial DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialed digits correctly Default 112 ms Value Range 64 16 n n 0 11 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 24 PB...

Page 431: ...e Dial Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a low speed pulse dial Low Speed Pulse Dial Pulse Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here Default 60 ms Value Range 20 4 n n 1 15 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuratio...

Page 432: ...nfiguration Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port High Speed Pulse Dial Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial High Speed Pulse Dial Pulse Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here Default 32 ms Value Range 12 4 n n 1 15 ms Maintenance...

Page 433: ...priate to your area Default Normal Value Range Normal Sweden New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type Option Card Equipment Option 1 and Option 2 Indicates the type of the card that is installed on the LCOT card reference only Default Not applicable Value Range None Caller ID Card Pay Tone Card Maintenance Console Location 9 24 P...

Page 434: ...m number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network Default 1 Value Range 0 no limit 1 2 3 Maintenance Console Location 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type Feature Manual References 4 1 3 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID FSK Carrier Detection Enables the PBX to detect the carrier when receiving Caller ID To enable this setting Caller ID Caller ID Signaling on ...

Page 435: ... the header of received Caller ID information To enable this setting Caller ID Caller ID Signaling on this screen should be set to FSK Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type Feature Manual References 4 1 3 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID FSK Detection Start Timer Specifies the length of time that the...

Page 436: ...red by the PBX to detect Caller ID information To enable this setting Caller ID Caller ID Signaling on this screen should be set to FSK Default 2000 ms Value Range 1040 80 n n 0 37 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property LCO type Feature Manual References 4 1 3 Caller ID 436 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 9 24 PBX Configuration 1 ...

Page 437: ...f service Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port Dialing Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the analog CO line Default DTMF Value Range DTMF Pulse Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature Manual References 5 1 4 Dial Mode Selection CPC Signal Detection Time O...

Page 438: ...y LCO Port Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the analog CO line Default Low Value Range Low High Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port Reverse Detection Selects the type of CO line call for which the reverse signal from the telephone company is detected Default Disable Value Range Disable For no CO line call O...

Page 439: ...Card Property LCO type Feature Manual References 4 1 3 Caller ID Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause Default 1 5 s Value Range 1 5 s 2 5 s 3 5 s 4 5 s Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature Manual References 15 1 2 Pause Insertion 9 1 5 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 18 1 8 Special ...

Page 440: ...e length of time after a CO line is disconnected during which the PBX cannot seize the line Default 1 5 s Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature Manual References 7 1 2 Flash Recall Terminate 440 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot P...

Page 441: ... that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the request to use an ISDN line as a TIE line Default 20 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type Feature Manual References 15 1 12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T203 Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2 Default ...

Page 442: ... Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP call setting message to ISDN Default 40 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T304 Spec...

Page 443: ...sage from ISDN Default 40 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T309 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link before disconnecting the call Default 120 Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration S...

Page 444: ...QSIG Slave T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message Default 0 Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message Default 0 Value Range 0 600 100...

Page 445: ... Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T3D3 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in Permanent mode Default 100 Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T3D9 Specifies t...

Page 446: ...resending the TEI check request to ISDN Default 10 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN Extension T203 Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2 Default 100 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type IS...

Page 447: ...s the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP call setting message to ISDN Default 40 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN Extension T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call Applies to overlap sending Default 200 Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Main...

Page 448: ...ault 300 Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN Extension T307 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX maintains a suspended call before restarting Default 1800 Value Range 0 6000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN Extension T308 Speci...

Page 449: ...oming Call Proceeding message Default 400 Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN Extension T312 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP call setting message to ISDN Default 60 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configurati...

Page 450: ...es the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message Default 40 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ISDN Extension T3D3 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in Permanent mode Default 300 Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 ...

Page 451: ...t L2 in Call by Call mode Default 200 Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 451 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type ...

Page 452: ...k Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Feature Manual References 10 1 18 ISDN INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK FEATURES 15 1 17 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES QSIG Connection Indicates the p...

Page 453: ...I Port Status Receive Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status of the call Default Ignore Value Range Ignore Ignore the Status Message from the network Disconnect Disconnect the call Maintenance Console Location 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Line Coding Selects the line coding type of the PRI PCM...

Page 454: ...n a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned Default CO Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to...

Page 455: ...rt Property PRI Port Feature Manual References 4 1 15 CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port ISDN Outgoing Call Type Selec...

Page 456: ... 1 4 PBX Configuration 3 1 4 Group Trunk Group Dialing Plan Feature Manual References 10 1 18 ISDN INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK FEATURES Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG Slave or QSIG Master Default Off Value Range Off On Maintenance Console ...

Page 457: ...on another PBX ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned Default CO Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 9 27 PBX Co...

Page 458: ...on The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Type Selects the port type Note Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension ...

Page 459: ...19 Finland 20 Norway 27 Australia 51 US National ISDN 2 Maintenance Console Location 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Feature Manual References 10 1 18 ISDN INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK FEATURES Network Numbering Plan The Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Config...

Page 460: ...On line mode Default Current status Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Trunk Property Selects the CO line property of the port Default Public Value Range Public Public network Private Private Network VPN Virtual Pr...

Page 461: ...onal Network Subscriber Maintenance Console Location 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Called Party Number Numbering Plan ID Public Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming CO line calls routed through public and private networks Default Public Unknown Private Private Value Range Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Maintenance C...

Page 462: ...Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Connection Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column a...

Page 463: ...tion Slot Port Property PRI Port Feature Manual References 4 1 15 CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation 15 1 18 Private Network Features QSIG CCBS Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber 15 1 20 Private Network Features QSIG CLIP COLP Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation and CNIP CONP Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation 15 1 19 Private Network Features QSIG CF C...

Page 464: ... to set the shelf to in service status Click OUS to set the shelf to out of service status To remove a legacy gateway from the STACK M card 1 Move the mouse pointer over the Shelf Status button A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer 2 Click Delete The legacy gateway will be deleted from the system and the corresponding shelf button will become grayed out Note The legacy gateway must be set t...

Page 465: ...al slot number within the legacy gateway where the card is installed Programming Port Properties for cards installed in legacy gateways When programming KX TDE KX NCP KX TDA PBXs using the Unified PC Maintenance Console a Command button is available to change the status INS OUS of ports being programmed To change the status of a port when programming via Web Maintenance Console click the desired c...

Page 466: ... pointer over the installed OPB3 card on the legacy gateway Slot screen A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer Select Card Property Unless noted otherwise the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX Refer to the corresponding Slot Card Property OPB3 section in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for more informat...

Page 467: ...Fault There is a communication error Maintenance Console Location 9 28 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Legacy GW1 Legacy GW2 Card Property OPB3 Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 467 9 28 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Legacy GW1 Legacy GW2 Card Property OPB3 ...

Page 468: ...le Location 9 29 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot DOORPHONE Card Card Property For Output Device Type Selects the type of connected output device for output ports only Default No 1 Not stored No 2 Door Opener No 3 Not stored Value Range Ringer Relay Door Opener Maintenance Console Location 9 29 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot DOORPHONE Card Card Property For Sensor Input Signal De...

Page 469: ...me after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from the sensor will be ignored Default No 1 Not stored No 2 Not stored No 3 10 s Value Range 10 n n 1 255 s Maintenance Console Location 9 29 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot DOORPHONE Card Card Property Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 469 9 29 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot DOORPHONE Card Card ...

Page 470: ...s successfully registered the status of the PS will update to show Registered De registration Follow the steps below to de register the PS 1 Click De registration A dialog box will appear Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left 2 Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for de registration Click Next A dialog box will appear 3 Click Confirm If t...

Page 471: ...es the PS number reference only Default Not applicable Value Range 1 512 Maintenance Console Location 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Feature Manual References 15 1 24 PS Portable Station Extension No Specifies the extension number of the PS In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode the PS can be used as a sub telephone with a wired main telephone PT SLT and two of them will share on...

Page 472: ...9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Programming Manual References 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main Extension Name Feature Manual References 15 1 24 PS Portable Station Status Indicates whether a certain PS is registered reference only Default None Value Range None Registered Maintenance Console Location 9 30 PBX Configuration 1...

Page 473: ...Feature Manual References 15 1 24 PS Portable Station Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 473 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station ...

Page 474: ...aintenance Console Location 9 31 PBX Configuration 1 3 Configuration Option System Wireless CO Status Display in Standby KX WT125 126 only Need System Restart Selects whether to display the CO status on the LCD of the PS when in stand by mode KX WT125 KX WT126 only Default Enable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 9 31 PBX Configuration 1 3 Configuration Option New Card Instal...

Page 475: ...dard Mode The CCBS CF CT and Unified Messaging features are supported DIL and DID call distribution are available for the D channel T1 LCOT mode DIL and DID call distribution are available for all 23B channels The CCBS CF CT and Unified Messaging features are not available in this mode Maintenance Console Location 9 31 PBX Configuration 1 3 Configuration Option Feature Manual References 5 1 8 DIL ...

Page 476: ...without being connected through the telephone company assign only one PBX as the clock source on the network That PBX should have a card connected to a telephone company line selected as its clock source All other PBXs should have cards connected to the network selected as the clock source This enables all PBXs on the network to synchronize their timing Default None Value Range None Shelf and Slot...

Page 477: ...t of available DSP resources based on the installed DSP card s reference only The number of resources provided by each type of DSP card is as follows DSP S card 63 DSP M card 127 DSP L card 254 Up to 2 DSP cards can be installed on the mother board Because the system reserves 2 resources for internal system functions the total amount of available resources indicated will be 2 less than the total r...

Page 478: ...ified message Specifies the number of UM ports including a fax port to reserve DSP resources for Default 0 Value Range 0 31 ports UM 30 ports Fax 1 port Maintenance Console Location 9 33 PBX Configuration 1 5 Configuration DSP Resource Feature Manual References 5 1 18 DSP Resource Usage Services Two way Recording Specifies the number of UM ports reserved in Services Unified message to use for Two ...

Page 479: ...1 18 DSP Resource Usage Services Conference trunk Specifies the number of conference rooms to reserve DSP resources for Default 0 Value Range 0 24 conference rooms Maintenance Console Location 9 33 PBX Configuration 1 5 Configuration DSP Resource Feature Manual References 5 1 18 DSP Resource Usage Services Free resources G 711 Indicates the amount of free DSP resources available to allocate refere...

Page 480: ...sconnected when setting values are changed and applied Default Apply now Value Range Set Specify a date and time to apply the changes and click OK The changes will be applied at the specified date and time Apply now The changes are applied immediately Click OK to apply the settings immediately Maintenance Console Location 9 33 PBX Configuration 1 5 Configuration DSP Resource 480 PC Programming Man...

Page 481: ...ted ratio of time the type of voice call function will be used 4 As values are entered the values in the Power column will increase to reflect the resource required for the input amounts Likewise the value for Free resources G 711 will decrease Note Click Clear to reset the input values and start again 5 When all items are allocated confirm that the amount of resources input does not exceed the va...

Page 482: ... displays DSP resource usage over time The time frame displayed can be displayed in increments of 1 hour 4 hours or 24 hours Up to 30 days of usage data can be stored Each site of a One look network can be viewed The DSP report feature is only accessible from the Master unit Only DSP resources that have been reserved in 9 33 1 PBX Configuration 1 5 1 Configuration DSP Resource Setting are displaye...

Page 483: ...guration 2 System This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 483 ...

Page 484: ...e the date and time Note When this setting is changed and applied it may take between 1 minute and several hours depending on the configuration of the PBX network for all connected IP PTs to reflect this change on their displays At default settings KX UT series SIP phones synchronize to the PBX s date and time once every hour Default Current date and time Value Range Year 2000 2035 Month 01 12 Day...

Page 485: ...ve units of a One look network For the Master unit only Disable can be selected Default Disable Value Range Disable Synchronization is not enabled for the Master unit and Stand alone units Enable Synchronization is enabled for Slave units Maintenance Console Location 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Feature Manual References 2 1 8 Automatic Time Adjustment Autom...

Page 486: ...5 Maintenance Console Location 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Feature Manual References 2 1 8 Automatic Time Adjustment SNTP Time Zone Time Zone Specifies your local UTC Coordinated Universal Time time zone using the up and down arrows Note If KX UT series SIP phones are connected to the PBX and this setting is changed they must be restarted for the new time z...

Page 487: ...of the PC reference only Default Not applicable Value Range 14 00 14 00 Maintenance Console Location 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Feature Manual References 2 1 8 Automatic Time Adjustment Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 487 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving ...

Page 488: ...BX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Feature Manual References 2 1 8 Automatic Time Adjustment Start Date Year Month Day Specifies the start date of daylight savings time Default Year 2011 For Daylight Saving Time number 1 The year advances by one for the subsequent Daylight Saving Times Month 3 Day Day of the second Sunday of the month Value Range Year 2000 2035 Month 1 12...

Page 489: ...the first Sunday of the month Value Range Year 2000 2035 Month 1 12 Day 1 31 Maintenance Console Location 10 1 2 1 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Programming Manual References 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving Feature Manual References 2 1 8 Automatic Time Adjustment Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 489...

Page 490: ...guration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Automated Attendant Operator Service Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM Programming Manual References 10 4 PBX Configuration 2 4 System Week Table 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group ...

Page 491: ...ure Manual References 13 1 4 Music on Hold BGM and Music on Hold Sound on Transfer Selects the audio source for Music for Transfer either the same music source chosen for the Music on Hold or ringback tone Default Same as Music on Hold Value Range Same as Music on Hold Ringback Tone Maintenance Console Location 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM Feature Manual References 4 1 10 Call Tr...

Page 492: ... time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer an Automatic Redial attempt This is the length of time that the called party s extension will ring for each attempt Default 3 Value Range 10 n n 1 30 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Manual References 17 1 1 Redial Last Number Automatic Redial Analog CO Mute Busy Detection Timer Specifie...

Page 493: ...cation 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Manual References 9 1 6 Hot Line Dial Extension First Digit Specifies the length of time after going off hook within which the first digit of a feature number or destination must be dialed before a reorder tone is heard Default 250 Value Range 1 250 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feat...

Page 494: ... the PBX recognizes end of dialing and stops muting the caller s voice over the analog CO line Default 10 Value Range 1 15 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Dial Analogue CO Inter digit Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an analog CO line If no digit is sent before this time expires the PB...

Page 495: ... Note that this setting is only valid for extensions whose Intercept No Answer Time Day Lunch Break Night is set to 0 Default 40 Value Range 1 240 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Intercept No Answer Time Intercept No Answer Time Day Lunch Break ...

Page 496: ...imers Counters Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 10 Call Transfer Recall Call Park Recall Specifies the length of time that a parked call waits to be retrieved before the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extens...

Page 497: ... 1 4 Call Hold Tone Length Busy Tone DND Tone Specifies the length of time that a busy DND tone is heard when a call is made to an extension in busy status or DND mode A reorder tone will be sent when this timer expires For a call through DISA the call will be disconnected when this timer expires Default 10 Value Range 1 15 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Co...

Page 498: ... setting is applied to PSs as well as PTs Default 3 Value Range 1 15 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Manual References 2 1 5 Automatic Extension Release 9 1 2 Hands free Operation DISA Door Reminder U Conf DISA Delayed Answer Timer Specifies the length of time that the caller hears a ringback tone before hearing an OGM Default 5 Value Range ...

Page 499: ...ice Message DISA Message Feature Manual References 5 1 10 DISA Direct Inward System Access DISA No Dial Intercept Timer Specifies the length of time after the OGM finishes playing in which the caller must begin dialing before the call is redirected to the operator Default 10 Value Range 0 120 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Programming Manual Refere...

Page 500: ...g destination after the original destination receives the call in each time mode Default 40 Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept Destination When called party does not answer Day Lunch Break Night 12 2...

Page 501: ... a CO to CO line call on a DISA line Selecting 0 enables the caller to prolong the CO to CO line call without restriction Default 10 Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Programming Manual References 13 3 2 PBX Configuration 5 3 2 Optional Device Voice Message DISA Message Feature Manual References 5 1 10 DISA Direct Inward System Access D...

Page 502: ...0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Programming Manual References 13 3 2 PBX Configuration 5 3 2 Optional Device Voice Message DISA Message Feature Manual References 14 1 2 OGM Outgoing Message DISA Reorder Tone Duration Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is sent to the caller before the call is disconnected If 0 is specified no reord...

Page 503: ... 3 System Timers Counters Programming Manual References 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone Feature Manual References 5 1 15 Doorphone Call Doorphone Call Duration Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected Default 6 Value Range 10 n n 0 30 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Programming Manual Referen...

Page 504: ...Open Timed Reminder Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times that an alarm is repeated Default 3 Value Range 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Manual References 19 1 4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder Interval Time Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms Default 3 Value Range 10 n n 1 120 s Maintenance Console Location 10 ...

Page 505: ...eives an Unattended Conference Recall tone Default 10 Value Range 60 n n 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Manual References 4 1 18 Conference Unattended Conference Warning Tone Start Timer Specifies the length of time until the parties involved in an Unattended Conference receive a warning tone after the conference originator receives th...

Page 506: ...Miscellaneous Caller ID Waiting to receive Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive Caller ID from an analog CO line If the Caller ID is received through an analog CO line card on which no Caller ID card is mounted or through a port to which Caller ID Detection is disabled this timer is not applicable Default 5 Value Range 0 15 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuratio...

Page 507: ...ter Specifies the number of successive incorrect PIN entries allowed before the extension PIN is locked A locked extension PIN cannot be used until reset from the extension assigned as manager Specifying None disables this counter Default None Value Range None 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Manual References 22 1 1 Walking COS 21 1 1 Ver...

Page 508: ...ces 18 3 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Feature Manual References 5 1 7 DID Direct Inward Dialing Incoming Call Inter digit Timer TIE Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a dialed number from a TIE line The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires Default 10 Value Range 3 30 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration ...

Page 509: ...iguration 2 3 System Timers Counters Programming Manual References 19 2 1 PBX Configuration 11 2 1 Maintenance CS Synchronization Air Synchronization Voice Mail Caller from VM to CO On hook Wait Time Specifies the length of time from when the voice mail seizes a CO line for example to transfer a call until the voice mail goes on hook If the time specified here is too short the voice mail will be u...

Page 510: ... Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters During Conversation Pause Signal Time Specifies the length of the pause inserted when the PAUSE button is pressed during a conversation Default 1 5 s Value Range 1 5 s 2 5 s 3 5 s 4 5 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Manual References 15 1 2 Pause Insertion System Wireless PS Out of ...

Page 511: ... the call is canceled Default 60 Value Range 0 120 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Programming Manual References 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Features Conference Group Call Operation 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Miscellaneous Conference Group Call Operation 11 9 PBX Configuration 3 ...

Page 512: ... 15 s Maintenance Console Location 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Feature Manual References 4 1 8 Call Pickup 512 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters ...

Page 513: ...ks click Time Setting 10 4 1 PBX Configuration 2 4 System Week Table Time Setting The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week for the selected Time Table as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods 1 Day Lunch Night Day1 Start Lunch Start Day2 Start Night Start Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each time block Default Day 1 ...

Page 514: ...n 2 4 System Week Table Time Setting Feature Manual References 19 1 2 Tenant Service 19 1 3 Time Service 2 Break Break 1 3 Start Hour Minute Specifies the start time for each break period Times can only be set when 2 Break Break 1 3 Start Setting is set to Enable Default 00 00 Value Range 00 00 23 59 Maintenance Console Location 10 4 1 PBX Configuration 2 4 System Week Table Time Setting Feature M...

Page 515: ... Setting is set to Enable Default 00 00 Value Range 00 00 23 59 Maintenance Console Location 10 4 1 PBX Configuration 2 4 System Week Table Time Setting Feature Manual References 19 1 2 Tenant Service 19 1 3 Time Service Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 515 10 4 1 PBX Configuration 2 4 System Week Table Time Setting ...

Page 516: ...iday settings Holiday Table Setting Enables the setting of the holiday Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 5 PBX Configuration 2 5 System Holiday Table Feature Manual References 19 1 3 Time Service Programming Manual References 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table Setting Holiday Table Start Date Month Specifies the month of the holiday st...

Page 517: ...M Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table Start Date Month Day Holiday Table End Date Month Specifies the month of the holiday end date Default 1 Value Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 10 5 PBX Configuration 2 5 System Holiday Table Feature Manual References 19 1 3 Time Service Programming Manual References 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table End Date Month Day...

Page 518: ...on 2 5 System Holiday Table Feature Manual References 19 1 3 Time Service Programming Manual References 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table End Date Month Day 518 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 10 5 PBX Configuration 2 5 System Holiday Table ...

Page 519: ...ion numbers and floating extension numbers Note Changing this value will also affect the following settings Extension Number as set in User Profiles and UM Configuration Mailbox Number when set to synchronize with Extension Number settings However Mailbox Number synchronization depends on the setting 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 9 Extension Mailbox Setting Mailbox Number...

Page 520: ...2 PBX Configuration 5 3 2 Optional Device Voice Message DISA Message 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main 20 1 UM Configuration 1 Mailbox Settings Mailbox Number No of Additional Digits Specifies the number of additional digits following the leading number Default Extension Numbering Scheme 1 20 22 64 XX Extension Numbering Scheme 21 X Value Range None 0 digit X 1 digit XX 2 digits Mainten...

Page 521: ...cation 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 11 1 2 PBX Configuration 3 1 2 Group Trunk Group Local Access Priority Feature Manual References 4 1 16 CO Line Access Trunk Group Access Specifies the feature number used to make a CO line call using an idle CO line from a certain trunk group Default 8 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Main...

Page 522: ...ial the last number dialed Default Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Manual References 17 1 1 Redial Last Number System Speed Dialing Personal Speed Dialing Specifies the feature number used to make a call using a System Personal Speed Dialing number Default Value Range Max 4 digits consisti...

Page 523: ...nance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Manual References 18 1 9 Speed Dialing Personal 18 1 10 Speed Dialing System DOORPHONE Call Specifies the feature number used to make a call to a doorphone Default 31 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Programmin...

Page 524: ...or off the external BGM Default 35 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Manager Manager Feature Manual References 3 1 2 BGM Background Music OGM Record Clear ...

Page 525: ...f 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 16 CO Line Access Parallel Telephone Ring Mode Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel an SLT connected in parallel with a DPT to ring when receiving an incomi...

Page 526: ...all Pickup Group Feature Manual References 4 1 8 Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain extension Default 41 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Exte...

Page 527: ...ences 19 1 1 TAFAS Trunk Answer From Any Station Group Paging Answer Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group Default 43 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 11 4 PBX Configuration 3 4 Group Paging Group Feature Manual References 15 1 1 Paging A...

Page 528: ... 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Optional Device Other Extensions Remote Operation by Other Extension Feature Manual References 22 1 1 Walking COS 21 1 1 Verification Code Entry Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set Cancel Specifies the feature num...

Page 529: ...Manual References 2 1 2 Account Code Entry Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve Specifies the feature number used to hold a call or retrieve a call on hold from the holding extension Default 50 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Manual References 4 1 4 Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve Specified with a Ho...

Page 530: ...uration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Manual References 4 1 7 Call Park Hold Retrieve Specified with a Held CO Line Number Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held CO line call from a different extension by specifying the held CO line number Default 53 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering ...

Page 531: ...6 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 13 4 PBX Configuration 5 4 Optional Device External Relay Feature Manual References 6 1 11 External Relay External Feature Access Specifies the feature number used to access the features of a host PBX or the telephone company Default ...

Page 532: ...sion Initiation Protocol Extension COLR Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel COLR which suppresses the presentation of the called party s number to the caller Default 7 0 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration...

Page 533: ...resentation 15 1 20 Private Network Features QSIG CLIP COLP Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation and CNIP CONP Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation Switch CLIP of CO Line Extension Specifies the feature number used to send either the CLIP number of the CO line in use subscriber s number or the extension to the network Default 7 2 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0...

Page 534: ... the feature number used to set or cancel Message Waiting or call back the caller Default 70 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Manual References 13 1 3 Message Waiting FWD DND Set Cancel Call from CO Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD DND for incoming CO line an...

Page 535: ...BX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Manual References 5 1 13 DND Do Not Disturb 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding FWD DND Set Cancel Call from Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD DND for incoming intercom calls Default 712 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Co...

Page 536: ...rtable Station FWD DND Feature Manual References 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding Group FWD Set Cancel Call from CO Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming CO line and intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group Default 714 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main P...

Page 537: ...ies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group Default 716 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Manual Referenc...

Page 538: ...sole Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 11 4 PBX Configuration 3 4 Group Paging Group Feature Manual References 15 1 1 Paging Walking Extension Specifies the feature number used to use the same extension settings at a new extension Default 727 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configu...

Page 539: ...Call Waiting notification from an extension Default 731 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Manual References 4 1 11 CALL WAITING FEATURES Call Waiting Mode Call from CO Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Call Waiting notification from a CO line doorphone or a call via an inc...

Page 540: ...e 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Executive Executive Busy Override Deny Feature Manual References 6 1 7 Executive Busy Override Not Ready Manual Wrap up Mode On Off Specifies the feature number used to enter or leave Not Ready mode Default 735 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbe...

Page 541: ...or used to monitor the status of an incoming call distribution group with the extension display Default 739 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous Supervisor Extension Number F...

Page 542: ...lay of an Absent Message Default 750 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Manual References 2 1 1 Absent Message BGM Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the BGM heard through the telephone speaker while on hook Default 751 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and...

Page 543: ...n Feature Manual References 19 1 4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder Default 760 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Manual References 19 1 4 Timed Reminder Printing Message Specifies the feature number used to select a...

Page 544: ...enance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Manual References 6 1 8 Extension Dial Lock Time Service Day Lunch Break Night Switch Specifies the feature number available for manager extensions used to change the time mode manually Default 780 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 Syste...

Page 545: ...gs Manager Manager Feature Manual References 6 1 8 Extension Dial Lock Remote Extension Dial Lock On Specifies the feature number available for manager extensions used to lock other extensions using the Extension Dial Lock feature Default 783 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual Refe...

Page 546: ...4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Feature Manual References 6 1 10 Extension PIN Personal Identification Number Dial Information CTI Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX Default Not stored Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console ...

Page 547: ...erence Group Feature Manual References 4 1 19 Conference Group Call Centralized BLF Monitor Cancel Specifies the feature number used to cancel monitoring of an extension using an NDSS button Default 784 Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Privat...

Page 548: ...numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called should be entered in this table A maximum of 16 leading numbers can be programmed Dial Specifies the leading extension number of the other PBX Default Not stored Value Range Max 3 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 17 1 PBX Configurat...

Page 549: ...e look network when the Time Service mode is Break mode Default Off Value Range On Off Maintenance Console Location 10 6 2 PBX Configuration 2 6 2 System Numbering Plan Quick Dial PC Programming Manual References 9 5 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Main Switch Time Service to Break in Isolated Mode Feature Manual References 16 1 1 Quick Dialing 19 1 3 Time Service Use quic...

Page 550: ...Phone Number Specifies the number to be dialed when the corresponding Quick Dialing number is used Default Not stored Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 10 6 2 PBX Configuration 2 6 2 System Numbering Plan Quick Dial Feature Manual References 16 1 1 Quick Dialing 15 1 23 Private Network Features VoIP Voice over Internet Pr...

Page 551: ... System Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call Feature Manual References 4 1 11 CALL WAITING FEATURES 5 1 13 DND Do Not Disturb 4...

Page 552: ...all receiving method to ring tone or voice Default Value Range 1 digit 0 9 or Maintenance Console Location 10 6 3 PBX Configuration 2 6 3 System Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Feature Manual References 10 1 14 Intercom Call Message Waiting Set Specifies the feature number used to leave a Message Waiting notification Default 4 Value Range 1 digit 0 9 or Maintenance Console Location 10 6 3 PBX...

Page 553: ...eceive callback ringing when the line becomes idle Default 6 Value Range 1 digit 0 9 or Maintenance Console Location 10 6 3 PBX Configuration 2 6 3 System Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Feature Manual References 2 1 4 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override 2 Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting or call an ex...

Page 554: ... Settings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call Feature Manual References 4 1 11 CALL WAITING FEATURES 5 1 13 DND Do Not Disturb 4 1 12 Call Waiting Tone 22 1 5 Whisper OHCA 554 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 10 6 3 PBX Configuration 2 6 3 System Numberin...

Page 555: ...f the COS Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 22 COS Class of Service TRS Level Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the Toll Restriction TRS level for making CO line calls in each time mode Default COS No 1 1 COS No 2 2 COS No 3 3 COS No 4 4 COS No 5 5 COS No 6 6 ...

Page 556: ...ces 19 1 5 TRS Toll Restriction TRS Level on Extension Lock Specifies the TRS level for making CO line calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial Lock feature Default 7 Value Range 1 Allows all CO line calls 2 6 Restricts CO line calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7 Restricts all CO line calls Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configura...

Page 557: ...ion Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 14 1 PBX Configuration 6 1 Feature System Speed Dial 15 5 PBX Configuration 7 5 TRS Miscellaneous TRS Override by System Speed Dialing Feature Manual References 18 1 9 Speed Dialing Personal 18 1 10 Speed Dialing System 19 1 5 TRS Toll Restriction CO SMDR COS Name Specifies the nam...

Page 558: ...PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Manual References 4 1 17 CO Line Call Limitation Transfer to CO Enables the transferring of calls to CO lines Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of ...

Page 559: ...1 6 FWD Call Forwarding Account Code Mode Specifies whether the entry of an account code is optional or mandatory when making a CO line call Default Option Value Range Option Forced Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 1...

Page 560: ...nce Main Feature Manual References 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Assistant COS Name Specifies the name of the COS Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 22 COS Class of Service Call Pickup by DSS Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a sp...

Page 561: ...ole Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Sta...

Page 562: ...d in Recall Transfer Recall in 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Recall Transfer Recall Feature Manual References 4 1 10 Call Transfer Automatic Answer Caller Enables a caller to have c...

Page 563: ... Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Manual References 4 1 6 Call Monitor Executive Busy Override Enables interrupt...

Page 564: ...nsions from interrupting calls Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Manual References 4 ...

Page 565: ...ramming Manual References 11 5 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Manual References 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding PT Programming Mode Specifies the level of authoriza...

Page 566: ...ion Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Manual References 13 1 1 Manager Features Time Service Switch Enables manual switching of time modes Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manua...

Page 567: ...happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook Default Enhanced DSS Value Range Enhanced DSS The registered owner extension is called Standard SDN A dial tone is heard Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Feature Manual References 15 1 4 PDN Primary Directory Number SDN Secondary Directory Number Extension Making call ...

Page 568: ... buttons on their own extensions using PT programming Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Feature Manual References 15 1 4 PDN Primary Directory Number SDN Secondary Directory Number Extension Optional Device Other Extensions COS Name Specifies the name of the COS Default Not stored Value Range M...

Page 569: ...Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Manual References 5 1 14 Door Open External Relay Access Enables access to external relays Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 13 4 PBX Configuration 5 4 Optional Device External Relay Feature Manual References 6 1...

Page 570: ...Allows the Walking COS feature to be used from a remote location inside the PBX or outside the PBX using DISA Default Allow Value Range Allow Deny Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension ...

Page 571: ...S Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 22 COS Class of Service CA Chat Enables the chat feature when using Communication Assistant CA Client Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Se...

Page 572: ...7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings CA CA Chat Feature Manual References 4 1 1 CA Communication Assistant Miscellaneous COS Name Specifies the name of the COS Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS S...

Page 573: ...eferences 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Miscellaneous Conference Group Call Ring Duration 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Features Conference Group Call Operation 11 9 PBX Configuration 3 9 Group Conference Group Feature Manual References 4 1 19 Conference Group Call Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 573 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 Syst...

Page 574: ...ock Maintenance Console Location 10 7 2 PBX Configuration 2 7 2 System Class of Service External Call Block Programming Manual References 10 4 PBX Configuration 2 4 System Week Table 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Fe...

Page 575: ...t All extensions Non Block Value Range Block blue Non Block Maintenance Console Location 10 7 3 PBX Configuration 2 7 3 System Class of Service Internal Call Block Programming Manual References 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main COS 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 ...

Page 576: ...efault Single Value Range Single Double Triple Option1 Option2 Maintenance Console Location 10 8 1 PBX Configuration 2 8 1 System Ring Tone Patterns Call from CO Programming Manual References 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Trunk Group Number 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 12 2 1 PBX Configuratio...

Page 577: ...gle Double Triple S Double Option 1 Option 2 Maintenance Console Location 10 8 2 PBX Configuration 2 8 2 System Ring Tone Patterns Call from DOORPHONE Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 13 1 PBX C...

Page 578: ...Tone Patterns Call from Others Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table Timed Reminder Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 Specifies the ring tone pattern for Timed Reminder alarms Default Triple Value Range Sin...

Page 579: ...rn Plan 1 8 Specifies the ring tone pattern for LCS warning tones Default Triple Value Range Single Double Triple Option 1 Option 2 Maintenance Console Location 10 8 3 PBX Configuration 2 8 3 System Ring Tone Patterns Call from Others Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 ...

Page 580: ... 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 580 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 10 8 3 PBX Configuration 2 8 3 System Ring Tone Patterns Call from Others ...

Page 581: ...hown on the displays of extensions The time display format assigned here applies when setting the Timed Reminder feature Default 12H Value Range 12H 24H Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 19 1 4 Timed Reminder PT LCD Password PIN Display Selects whether passwords and PINs Personal Identification Number are hidden or shown on the ...

Page 582: ...ion FWD DND 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Manual References 5 1 13 DND Do Not Disturb 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding 12 1 1 LED Indication PT Fwd DND DND LED Selects the light pattern of the FWD DND button while the DND feature is activated Default On Solid Value Range On Solid Red on Flash Slow red flashing Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration...

Page 583: ...tching cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Programming Manual References 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Manual References 5 1 13 DND Do Not Disturb 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding PT Fwd DND Paging to DND Extension Specifies whether ext...

Page 584: ...ding PT Operation Off Hook Monitor Enables the use of Off Hook Monitor with DPTs and IP PTs Default Enable Value Range Disable The PT user s voice is sent through the handsfree microphone The other party s voice is heard through the hands free speaker Enable The PT user s voice is sent through the handset microphone The other party s voice is heard through both the hands free speaker and the hands...

Page 585: ...sable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 6 1 7 Executive Busy Override PT Operation JOG Dial Speed Selects the speed at which items scroll on the display when the Jog Dial is used Default Normal Value Range Normal High Speed Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options P...

Page 586: ... Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 9 1 1 Hands free Answerback PT Operation Automatic Hold by ICM CO ICD Group Key Selects whether calls are disconnected or held when an INTERCOM PDN CO or ICD Group button is pressed while having a conversation Default Disable Disconnect Value Range Disable Disconnect Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 Sy...

Page 587: ...ature Manual References 4 1 4 Call Hold Option 2 Extension Clear Call Waiting Specifies whether the Call Waiting setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed Default Clear Value Range Clear Do not clear Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 6 1 9 Extension Feature Clear Extension Clear Fwd DND Specifies whether the F...

Page 588: ... PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 6 1 9 Extension Feature Clear CODEC System CODEC Selects the codec type for PSs Default Mu Law Value Range A Law Mu Law Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options CODEC Network CODEC Selects the codec type for ISDN lines Default Mu Law Value Range A Law Mu Law Maintenance Console Location 10 9...

Page 589: ...ed Default Enable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Programming Manual References 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port CO Setting ISDN Outgoing Call Type Feature Manual References 10 1 18 ISDN INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK FEATURES Redial Automatic Redial when No Answer ISDN Selects whether...

Page 590: ...rences 17 1 1 Redial Last Number Redial Call Log by Redial key Enables display of the Outgoing Call Log on a display PT by pressing the REDIAL button while on hook Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 17 1 1 Redial Last Number Extension CO Call Limitation For Incoming Call Selects whether ...

Page 591: ...utside destinations to continue after the originator of the conference has left the conference Default Enable Value Range Enable The call will be disconnected Disable The call will continue Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 4 1 18 Conference 15 1 22 Private Network Features QSIG Enhanced Features Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone ...

Page 592: ...System Options Feature Manual References 9 1 1 Hands free Answerback 15 1 1 Paging 4 1 20 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone Tone 3 1 Start Talking after Making Call Call from DOORPHONE Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3 1 Confirmation Tone 3 1 is heard from an extension when for example it pages another extension or from a doorphone when the doorphone button is pressed Default Enable Va...

Page 593: ...1 Confirmation Tone 4 1 is heard from an extension when a new party joins a conference call Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 4 1 18 Conference 4 1 20 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone Tone 4 2 Finish Conference Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4 2 Confirmation Tone 4 2 is hea...

Page 594: ...on Tone Dial Tone Distinctive Dial Tone Enables the PBX to send dial tones at different frequencies depending on the setting of the extension Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 5 1 5 Dial Tone Dial Tone Dial Tone for Extension Selects the dial tone the PBX sends to extensions to inform ab...

Page 595: ...System System Options Programming Manual References 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port 16 1 PBX Configuration 8 1 ARS System Setting Feature Manual References 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route Selection 5 1 5 Dial Tone Echo Cancel Conference Enables the use of echo canceling for conference calls Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 P...

Page 596: ...Echo Cancel Extension to Digital Line Enables the use of echo canceling for extension to ISDN line calls If set to Enable echo canceling is used for extension to ISDN line calls If set to Disable echo canceling is not used for extension to ISDN line calls Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 4 DSS Key DSS ke...

Page 597: ...ng it will pick up the call Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 4 1 8 Call Pickup DSS Key Call Pick up by DSS key for ICD Group Call Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified incoming call distribution group To enable this setting DSS Key DSS key mode for Incoming Call on this screen ...

Page 598: ...ler Information Display before Call Pick up Specifies whether incoming caller information is displayed after pressing the DSS button when a call is ringing at the designated extension instead of answering the call Default Disable Value Range Enable Pressing the DSS button displays the caller s information Disable Pressing the DSS button answers the call Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Config...

Page 599: ...4 1 3 Caller ID Private Network TIE Call by Extension Numbering Enables extensions at two PBXs connected in a network to have the same leading number For example extension 101 is registered at PBX 1 and extension 102 is registered at PBX 2 Only the Extension Number Method is supported If disabled different leading numbers need to be assigned for extensions at each PBX Default Enable Value Range Di...

Page 600: ...r of the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent to the forwarding destination to identify the origin of a CO line call Default Enable Value Range Disable The CLIP number assigned to the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent Enable The CLIP number of the calling party is sent Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 10 1 4 ICD ...

Page 601: ...f time This feature must be enabled to allow PS roaming Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Programming Manual References 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Miscellaneous System Wireless PS Out of Range Timer Feature Manual References 15 1 16 Private Network Features PS Roaming by Network ICD Group ...

Page 602: ...ole Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 9 1 1 Hands free Answerback Display Information from Mobile Extension MEX when using Automatic Walking COS If Automatic Walking COS is being used this selects whether to show the CLI destination s extension number as the CLIP information Extension Number or the MEX CLIP information MEX CLIP when the incoming ca...

Page 603: ...Message Waiting Lamp Pattern Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp light pattern of SLTs Default 11 Value Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 13 1 3 Message Waiting Whisper OHCA for SLT Enables the use of Whisper OHCA to SLTs and IP PTs Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Config...

Page 604: ...O Enables the PBX to automatically set a CO line to Busy Out status when a loop current is not detected preventing that CO line from being used Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options PT Feature Access No 1 8 Specifies the System Feature Access Menu 1 8 shown on the display of an extension Default No 1 Call Back Cance...

Page 605: ...10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options ISDN Option Calling Party Name Presentation to PRI23 Specifies whether the name of the calling party is displayed when making a call to the ISDN network Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options ISDN Option Calling Party Name Sending Format Specifies the sending format of...

Page 606: ...s repeated for First Party Call Control CTI such as Communication Assistant CA When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times without success the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost Default 1 Value Range 0 10 Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 4 1 24 CTI Com...

Page 607: ...tions Feature Manual References 4 1 24 CTI Computer Telephony Integration 3rd Party CTI CDR retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR is retried when no response is received for Third Party Call Control CTI Default 20 Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 4 1 24 CTI Computer Te...

Page 608: ...Selects whether to force an extension to become idle while having a call held on a PDN SDN button Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 15 1 4 PDN Primary Directory Number SDN Secondary Directory Number Extension Option 7 Incoming Call Log Busy Intercept when Called Party is Busy Specifies ...

Page 609: ...alls feature Calls rerouted via the FWD Busy feature If this setting is enabled calls are recorded as Not Answered Default Enable Not Answered Value Range Enable Not Answered Disable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 4 1 5 Call Log Incoming Incoming Call Log Call Pickup Specifies how calls answered using the Call Pickup feature ...

Page 610: ...tension TIE calls are recorded in the calling extension s outgoing call log Default Enable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 17 1 1 Redial Last Number Option 8 P2P Group Priority Voice 1 Priority Voice 2 Priority Voice 3 Specifies the order of priority of the codecs to use for P2P groups Default Priori...

Page 611: ...ature Manual References 15 1 5 Peer to Peer P2P Connection Extension Trunk P2P IP Extension SIP Trunk P2P Specifies whether P2P connections are enabled between SIP CO lines and IP extensions Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Feature Manual References 15 1 5 Peer to Peer P2P Connection Conference Group Maximum Nu...

Page 612: ... System Options PC Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Extension Number 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main Extension Number 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Mailbox Number Feature Manual References 20 1 2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES Ex...

Page 613: ...ferences 20 1 2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES Walking Extension Option Home position control Selects whether to use the Home position control feature for Walking Extension or Enhanced Walking Extension Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options PC Programming Manual References 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering...

Page 614: ...ttings Feature Manual References 4 1 3 Caller ID Channel Seizure Signal Bits Specifies the number of seizure bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT Default 300 Value Range 10 n n 3 40 bits Maintenance Console Location 10 10 PBX Configuration 2 10 System Extension CID Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 3 Caller ID Mark Signal Bits Specifies the number of mark bits to send whe...

Page 615: ...erences 4 1 3 Caller ID Caller ID Signal Type Specifies the type of signal modulation to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT reference only Default FSK Value Range FSK Maintenance Console Location 10 10 PBX Configuration 2 10 System Extension CID Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 3 Caller ID Additional Local Trunk Access Code to Extension Caller ID Enables the PBX to automati...

Page 616: ... Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 3 Caller ID Send Caller ID Name to Extension Enables the PBX to send the caller s name when sending Caller ID information to an SLT Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 10 PBX Configuration 2 10 System Extension CID Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 3 Caller ID Send Caller ID Long Distance to Extension Enables the PB...

Page 617: ...onsole Location 10 10 PBX Configuration 2 10 System Extension CID Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 3 Caller ID FSK Transmission Level for MCSLC Card Specifies the transmission level for FSK signal modulation for MCSLC cards Default 6 dB Value Range 14 dB 12 dB 10 dB 8 dB 6 dB 4 dB 2 dB 0 dB Maintenance Console Location 10 10 PBX Configuration 2 10 System Extension CID Settings Feature Manual...

Page 618: ...ues are used Default KX NS1000 Value Range KX NS1000 KX NS700 KX NS500 KX NS300 Maintenance Console Location 10 11 1 PBX Configuration 2 11 1 System Audio Gain Paging MOH Programming Manual References 11 4 PBX Configuration 3 4 Group Paging Group Feature Manual References 14 1 4 One look Network 15 1 1 Paging Paging EPG 1 6 External Pager 1 6 Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port EPG...

Page 619: ...3 4 Group Paging Group Feature Manual References 15 1 1 Paging External MOH MOH 1 8 Music On Hold 1 8 Specifies the music volume for External BGM port MOH numbers that cannot be set according to the model selected in PBX Model will be grayed out Default 0 dB Value Range 31 5 31 5 dB Maintenance Console Location 10 11 1 PBX Configuration 2 11 1 System Audio Gain Paging MOH Programming Manual Refere...

Page 620: ...ult MOH 1 7 10 dB Value Range 31 5 31 5 dB Maintenance Console Location 10 11 1 PBX Configuration 2 11 1 System Audio Gain Paging MOH Programming Manual References 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM Feature Manual References 13 1 4 Music on Hold 3 1 2 BGM Background Music 620 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 10 11 1 PBX Configuration 2 11 1 System Audio Gain Paging MOH ...

Page 621: ...e 31 5 31 5 dB Maintenance Console Location 10 11 2 PBX Configuration 2 11 2 System Audio Gain Card Down Gain From PBX Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to the selected type of card Default 0 dB Value Range 15 5 15 5 dB Maintenance Console Location 10 11 2 PBX Configuration 2 11 2 System Audio Gain Card Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 621 10 11 2 PBX Configuration ...

Page 622: ...622 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 10 11 2 PBX Configuration 2 11 2 System Audio Gain Card ...

Page 623: ...iguration 3 Group This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Group menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 623 ...

Page 624: ...rences 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings COS Specifies the COS of the trunk group applied when making a call from a CO line to another CO line with TIE Line Service If you wish to prevent such calls from being made ensure that the COS specified here has a TRS level of 7 assigned for all relevant time modes in 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Se...

Page 625: ...ttings Feature Manual References 4 1 16 CO Line Access CO CO Duration Time 60s Specifies the length of time that a CO to CO line call can be maintained before being disconnected Default 10 Value Range None 1 60 60 s Maintenance Console Location 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings F...

Page 626: ... Table Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information telephone number Default 1 Value Range 1 4 Maintenance Console Location 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 11 1 3 PBX Configuration 3 1 3 Group Trunk Group Caller ID Modification 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 3...

Page 627: ...PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings DISA Tone Detection Silence Enables the disconnection of a DISA originated CO to CO line call by silence detection Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Optional Device Voice Message DIS...

Page 628: ... DISA Tone Detection Cyclic Enables the disconnection of a DISA originated CO to CO line call by cyclic signal detection Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Optional Device Voice Message DISA System 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Cal...

Page 629: ...ess a CO line from the host PBX Default Not stored Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Feature Manual References 9 1 5 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Document Ver...

Page 630: ...gned to the corresponding priority level Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority Default Priority X X Value Range Trunk Group No 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 11 1 2 PBX Configuration 3 1 2 Group Trunk Group Local Access Priority Programming Manual References 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 16 CO Line Acces...

Page 631: ...nd 1 long distance code can be programmed Each trunk group can select a table for use Select the desired table from the Modification Table list If the modified number does not contain an area code programmed here the PBX applies the Long Distance Code settings to the modified number Area Code for Local International Call Data 1 10 Specifies the leading number area code to look for in the incoming ...

Page 632: ...eature Manual References 4 1 3 Caller ID Length of Digits The PBX adds a certain number of digits to the caller s number depending on the length of digits as programmed in the Length of Digits Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group This modification is applied to incoming CO line calls routed through public networks when the type of network numbering plan is Unknown or not specified A max...

Page 633: ...d here must be smaller than Minimum Caller ID Digits for International Default 8 Value Range 0 30 Maintenance Console Location 11 1 3 PBX Configuration 3 1 3 Group Trunk Group Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Calling Party Number Type of Number Public Private 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port ...

Page 634: ...Minimum Caller ID Digits for International Default Not stored Value Range Max 8 digits 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 1 3 PBX Configuration 3 1 3 Group Trunk Group Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Calling Party Number Type of Number Public Private 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Pro...

Page 635: ...al References 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Calling Party Number Type of Number Public Private 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Called Party Number Type of Number Public Private Feature Manual References 4 1 3 Caller ID Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller s number in the place of the removed...

Page 636: ...ber Type of Number Public Private 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Called Party Number Type of Number Public Private Feature Manual References 4 1 3 Caller ID 636 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 11 1 3 PBX Configuration 3 1 3 Group Trunk Group Caller ID Modification ...

Page 637: ...ign Leading Number Specifies the leading number to be regarded as the beginning of dialing Default No 1 in Dialing Plan Table 1 N11 No 2 in Dialing Plan Table 1 NXX NXX XXXX No 3 in Dialing Plan Table 1 1NXX NXX XXXX Others Not stored Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 N 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P 0 1 and X 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 1 4 PBX Configuration 3 1 4 Group Trunk Group Diali...

Page 638: ...the number dialed by en bloc dialing in the place of the removed digits Default Not stored Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 1 4 PBX Configuration 3 1 4 Group Trunk Group Dialing Plan Feature Manual References 10 1 18 ISDN INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK FEATURES 638 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 11 1 4 PBX Configuration 3 1 4 Grou...

Page 639: ...Range Type A 1 N11 2 NXX XXXX 3 1NXX NXX XXXX 4 50 Not stored Type B 1 N11 2 NNX XXXX 3 1NPX NXX XXXX 4 50 Not stored Type C 1 N11 2 NXX XXXX 3 1NNX XXXX 4 1NPX NXX XXXX 5 50 Not stored Type D 1 47 Not stored 48 N11 49 NXX XXXX 50 1NXX NXX XXXX Type E 1 N11 2 NXX NXX XXXX 3 1NXX NXX XXXX 4 50 Not stored Maintenance Console Location 11 1 4 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 4 Group Dialing Plan Auto Assign Pr...

Page 640: ...aracters Maintenance Console Location 11 2 PBX Configuration 3 2 Group User Group Programming Manual References 11 3 PBX Configuration 3 3 Group Call Pickup Group 11 4 PBX Configuration 3 4 Group Paging Group 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main User Group 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Main User Group Featur...

Page 641: ... PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 8 1 1 GROUP FEATURES 19 1 2 Tenant Service Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 641 11 2 PBX Configuration 3 2 Group User Group ...

Page 642: ... 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 8 Call Pickup 8 1 1 GROUP FEATURES Pickup Group 1st 8th Selects the call pickup groups that the extension user group belongs to One extension user group can be assigned to a maximum of 8 call pickup groups on this screen To assign an extension...

Page 643: ...6 Maintenance Console Location 11 3 PBX Configuration 3 3 Group Call Pickup Group Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 8 Call Pickup 8 1 1 GROUP FEATURES Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 643 11 3 PBX Configurat...

Page 644: ...nsion Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 8 Call Pickup 8 1 1 GROUP FEATURES Main Call Pickup Group Monitor Feature For a pickup group specifies whether display indications and tones are enabled to notify extension users when a call that can be answered by an extension in the pickup group arri...

Page 645: ...ocation 11 3 1 PBX Configuration 3 3 Group Call Pickup Group All Setting Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 8 Call Pickup 8 1 1 GROUP FEATURES Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 645 11 3 1 PBX Configuration 3 3...

Page 646: ...roup Paging Group Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 15 1 1 Paging 8 1 1 GROUP FEATURES Paging Group 1st 8th Selects the paging groups that the extension user group belongs to One extension user group can be assigned to a maxi...

Page 647: ...ng Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 15 1 1 Paging 8 1 1 GROUP FEATURES Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 647 11 4 PBX Configuration 3 4 Group Paging Group ...

Page 648: ...Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 15 1 1 Paging 8 1 1 GROUP FEATURES User Group 1 256 Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group Default User Group 1 30 ON for same numbered paging group User Group 32 ON User Group 31 33 96 OFF Value Range ON blue OFF white Maintenance Console Location 11 4 1 PBX Co...

Page 649: ...Feature Manual References 15 1 1 Paging 8 1 1 GROUP FEATURES Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 649 11 4 1 PBX Configuration 3 4 Group Paging Group All Setting ...

Page 650: ...guration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 15 1 1 Paging 8 1 1 GROUP FEATURES External Pager 1 16 Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group Default ON Value Range ON blue OFF Maintenance Console Location 11 4 2 PBX Configuration 3 4 Group Paging Group External Pager Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configurati...

Page 651: ... Main Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group Default Groups 001 064 601 664 Groups 065 128 Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group Defa...

Page 652: ...gs Feature Manual References 10 1 2 ICD Group Features Group Call Distribution FWD Mode Specifies whether extensions in FWD mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group Default Ring Value Range No Ring Ring Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 2 PBX Configura...

Page 653: ... Table number Default 1 Value Range 1 32 or 1 128 Note The maximum number of tenants depends on the System Capacity Selection setting made when the Easy Setup Wizard was run for the PBX If the System Resource Type was selected the maximum number of tenants is 128 If the SIP Extension Type or IP Extension Type was selected the maximum number of tenants is 32 For details refer to 5 4 1 Easy Setup Wi...

Page 654: ...tem Class of Service External Call Block 10 7 3 PBX Configuration 2 7 3 System Class of Service Internal Call Block Feature Manual References 10 1 15 Internal Call Block CLIP on ICD Group Button Specifies the CLIP number sent to the network when making calls using the ICD Group button Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configu...

Page 655: ...sy Destination Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the overflow destination of calls that cannot be queued in each time mode Default Not stored Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References 10 4 PBX Configuration 2 4 System Week Table Feature ...

Page 656: ...ration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group Default ICD Group 001 ICD Group 128 Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Time out Manual Queue Redirection Destination Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the o...

Page 657: ...destination Default None Value Range None 10 n n 1 125 s Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Manual References 10 1 6 ICD Group Features Queuing 10 1 5 ICD Group Features Overflow Hurry up Level Specifies the number of calls to hold in the queue before prompting Manual Queue Redirection by flashing the Hurry up b...

Page 658: ...ion 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group Default ICD Group 001 ICD Group 128 Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Queuing Time Table Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the Queuing Time Table to be used i...

Page 659: ...iscellaneous Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group Default Groups 001 064 601 664 Groups 065 128 Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution gro...

Page 660: ...cutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically logged out from the incoming call distribution group Default None Value Range None 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Manual References 10 1 3 ICD Group Features Log in Log out Maximum No of Busy Extension Specifies the number of extensions ...

Page 661: ... Settings Feature Manual References 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding Last Extension Log out Specifies whether the last extension logged in to the incoming call distribution group is allowed to log out Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Manual References 10 1 3 ICD Group Feature...

Page 662: ...ion 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Manual References 10 1 7 ICD Group Features Supervisory Programmed Mailbox No 16 Digits Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems VPS with DTMF Integration Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Co...

Page 663: ...l Distribution Group Group Settings Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of unanswered calls to the incoming call distribution group that can be logged in the call log memory Default 10 Value Range 0 100 Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 5 Call Log Incoming Group FWD Call from CO ...

Page 664: ...all Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Manual References 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding Group FWD Call from Extension Setting Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls reference only Default Off Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Manual References 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding...

Page 665: ...ce Console Location 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Manual References 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 665 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings ...

Page 666: ...etting To copy the members to another group click Member list copy select the group and click OK Extension Number Specifies the extension number of each member In addition to the extension numbers of PT SLT and PS extensions floating extension numbers of PS Ring groups can also be specified Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 1 PBX Conf...

Page 667: ...hat must pass after completing a call before the member extension can accept another call This timer is used when Options Wrap up Timer based on is set to ICD Group Member in 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Default 0 Value Range 10 n n 0 300 s Maintenance Console Location 11 5 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Gro...

Page 668: ...Station Extension Settings Option 8 Wrap up Timer Feature Manual References 10 1 3 ICD Group Features Log in Log out 668 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings ...

Page 669: ... 5 n n 1 16 s If preceded by an OGM plays the Music on Hold for the specified period of time if not preceded by an OGM sends a ringback tone for the specified period of time OGM 01 64 Sends a certain OGM Queue No Announces how many calls precede the caller in the waiting queue Queue No and Time Announces how many calls precede the caller in the waiting queue and the estimated wait time Maintenance...

Page 670: ...hat are redirected and are answered by the overflow destination are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Feature Manual References 10 1 1 ICD GROUP FEATURES Options IC...

Page 671: ...ion Group Miscellaneous Feature Manual References 10 1 2 ICD Group Features Group Call Distribution Options Wrap up Timer based on Selects whether the ICD Group member wrap up timer or extension wrap up timer is used If Extension is selected here Wrap up Timer on 11 5 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List becomes unavailable If ICD Group Memb...

Page 672: ... Logout Specifies whether overflow redirection is processed when all members of an ICD group are logged out Default Enable Queuing Busy Destination Value Range Enable Queuing Busy Destination Disable Keep Queuing Maintenance Console Location 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Feature Manual References 10 1 1 ICD GROUP FEATURES Options Call Log for B...

Page 673: ...laneous Feature Manual References 10 1 8 ICD Group Features Supervisory Feature ACD Options ICD Group Call Monitor View Screen Update Time s Specifies the screen update interval time for the ICD Group Call Monitor View Default 5 Value Range 5 60 Maintenance Console Location 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Feature Manual References 10 1 1 ICD GROU...

Page 674: ...e will hear the special announcement Default 30 Value Range 10 60 min Maintenance Console Location 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Feature Manual References 10 1 6 ICD Group Features Queuing Options UM System Guidance UM System Guidance for Queue No Queue No and Time Specifies the announcement heard by callers in an ICD queue about the estimated ...

Page 675: ...uing Options 2nd line LCD display information for ICD Group redirected call Select the information displayed on the second line of the PT s display when an incoming call is redirected to the ICD group that the extension belongs to Default Last destination Value Range Last destination First destination Maintenance Console Location 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Incoming Call Distribution Grou...

Page 676: ...click the left arrow button 3 Click OK The ACD supervisor selected above is displayed as follows First Name The first name of the ACD supervisor reference only Last Name The last name of the ACD supervisor reference only Ext No The extension number of the ACD supervisor reference only To assign the ICD Groups that are monitored by the ACD Supervisor 1 In the ICD Group column click the Edit button ...

Page 677: ...erflow destinations easily click Destination Setting see 2 1 7 Extension Number Setting Hunting Group Name Specifies the name of the hunting group Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 6 PBX Configuration 3 6 Group Extension Hunting Group Feature Manual References 10 1 10 Idle Extension Hunting Hunting Type Specifies the hunting type for the hunting group...

Page 678: ...ue Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 11 6 PBX Configuration 3 6 Group Extension Hunting Group Feature Manual References 10 1 10 Idle Extension Hunting 678 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 11 6 PBX Configuration 3 6 Group Extension Hunting Group ...

Page 679: ...Group Extension Hunting Group Member List Programming Manual References 11 6 PBX Configuration 3 6 Group Extension Hunting Group Feature Manual References 10 1 10 Idle Extension Hunting Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extension number is specified in Extension Number above reference only Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 6 1...

Page 680: ...sole Location 11 7 1 PBX Configuration 3 7 1 Group UM Group System Settings Programming Manual References 9 7 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Port Property Feature Manual References 10 1 6 ICD Group Features Queuing 20 1 2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES UM Ports and the UM Group Intercept to Mailbox for Call to Extension Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to...

Page 681: ...able Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 11 7 1 PBX Configuration 3 7 1 Group UM Group System Settings Feature Manual References 10 1 2 ICD Group Features Group Call Distribution Transfer Recall to Mailbox Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the Unified Messaging system in these situations 1 when a call is transferred to an extens...

Page 682: ...uration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Port Property Feature Manual References 20 1 2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES UM Ports and the UM Group 682 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 11 7 1 PBX Configuration 3 7 1 Group UM Group System Settings ...

Page 683: ... Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 11 7 2 PBX Configuration 3 7 2 Group UM Group Unit Settings Programming Manual References 9 7 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot UM Port Property Feature Manual References 20 1 2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES UM Ports and the UM Group Group Name Specifies the name of the UM group which will be shown on the displ...

Page 684: ... name of the PBX to be used for UM Group Failover During a PBX operation failure incoming calls routed to the UM group of the offline PBX will be automatically redirected to the specified PBX s UM group Default Unassigned Value Range Unassigned Site number and Site name Maintenance Console Location 11 7 2 PBX Configuration 3 7 2 Group UM Group Unit Settings PC Programming Manual References 1 2 3 1...

Page 685: ...ings Extension No Indicates the extension number assigned to the UM port reference only Default No 1 5101 No 2 5102 Others Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 11 7 2 1 PBX Configuration 3 7 2 Group UM Group Unit Settings Member List Programming Manual References 11 7 2 PBX Configuration 3 7 2 Group UM Group Unit Settings Feature Manual References 20 1...

Page 686: ...oup UM Group Unit Settings Member List Programming Manual References 11 7 2 PBX Configuration 3 7 2 Group UM Group Unit Settings Feature Manual References 20 1 2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES UM Ports and the UM Group 686 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 11 7 2 PBX Configuration 3 7 2 Group UM Group Unit Settings ...

Page 687: ...e Manual References 15 1 27 PS Ring Group Group Name Specifies the name of the PS ring group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the PS ring group when Incoming Trunk Call Information Display on this screen is set to Called Number Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 8 PBX Configuration 3 8 Group PS Ring Group Feature Manual Refere...

Page 688: ...ID Called Number Maintenance Console Location 11 8 PBX Configuration 3 8 Group PS Ring Group Feature Manual References 15 1 27 PS Ring Group 688 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 11 8 PBX Configuration 3 8 Group PS Ring Group ...

Page 689: ...ole Location 11 8 1 PBX Configuration 3 8 Group PS Ring Group Member List Programming Manual References 11 8 PBX Configuration 3 8 Group PS Ring Group 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 15 1 27 PS Ring Group Extension Name Indicates the name of the PS reference only Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Cons...

Page 690: ...Feature Manual References 15 1 27 PS Ring Group 690 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 11 8 1 PBX Configuration 3 8 Group PS Ring Group Member List ...

Page 691: ...nce group Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 11 9 PBX Configuration 3 9 Group Conference Group Feature Manual References 4 1 19 Conference Group Call Broadcast Mode Specifies whether only the original caller can speak or up to 8 people can speak at the start of a conference group call Default Disable Value Range Disable The original caller and up to 7 par...

Page 692: ...eferences 4 1 19 Conference Group Call Automatic Answer w o Extension Setting Specifies if the extensions of the conference will automatically answer a conference group call even if Hands free Answerback is not set for those extensions This setting can be used with PTs and KX WT125 KX TCA185 KX TCA285 KX TCA385 PSs Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 11 9 PBX Co...

Page 693: ... of the conference group Default Not stored Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 11 9 1 PBX Configuration 3 9 Group Conference Group Member List Programming Manual References 11 9 PBX Configuration 3 9 Group Conference Group Feature Manual References 4 1 19 Conference Group Call Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extens...

Page 694: ...Feature Manual References 4 1 19 Conference Group Call 694 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 11 9 1 PBX Configuration 3 9 Group Conference Group Member List ...

Page 695: ...roup Feature Manual References 15 1 5 Peer to Peer P2P Connection Bandwidth Control Specifies whether to use the bandwidth precedence setting of the P2P group for calling among different P2P groups Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 11 10 PBX Configuration 3 10 Group P2P Group Feature Manual References 15 1 5 Peer to Peer P2P Connection Document Version 2016 03...

Page 696: ...reen is for programming legacy gateway PBXs For information about setting up a legacy gateway PBX see 9 28 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Legacy GW1 Legacy GW2 Unless noted otherwise the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX Refer to the corresponding Group VM DPT Group System Settings section in the PC Programming Manual ...

Page 697: ...e This screen is for programming legacy gateway PBXs For information about setting up a legacy gateway PBX see 9 28 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Legacy GW1 Legacy GW2 Unless noted otherwise the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX Refer to the corresponding Group VM DPT Group Unit Settings section in the PC Programming ...

Page 698: ... 28 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Legacy GW1 Legacy GW2 Unless noted otherwise the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX Refer to the corresponding Group VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List section in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for more information The Site Shelf and Slot and Port for each item...

Page 699: ...creen is for programming legacy gateway PBXs For information about setting up a legacy gateway PBX see 9 28 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Legacy GW1 Legacy GW2 Unless noted otherwise the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX Refer to the corresponding Group VM DTMF Group System Settings section in the PC Programming Manua...

Page 700: ...This screen is for programming legacy gateway PBXs For information about setting up a legacy gateway PBX see 9 28 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Legacy GW1 Legacy GW2 Unless noted otherwise the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX Refer to the corresponding Group VM DTMF Group Group Settings section in the PC Programming ...

Page 701: ... the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX Refer to the corresponding Group VM DTMF Group Group Settings Member List section in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for more information Only ports set to VM DPT for DPT Type Type in the extension s Port Property screen will be displayed For details see To access port p...

Page 702: ...702 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 11 12 2 PBX Configuration 3 12 2 Group VM DTMF Group Group Settings ...

Page 703: ...ation 4 Extension This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Extension menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 703 ...

Page 704: ...click CLIP Generate The Site Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Main Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extensio...

Page 705: ...rrent connected telephone type Value Range DPT Other DPT T76xx DT DPT is connected APT APT is connected DSS DSS Console is connected VM VPS is connected ISDN Extension ISDN telephone is connected OPX T1 OPX port T1 CS CS is connected IP PT IP PT belonging to the V IPEXT card is connected P SIP Panasonic SIP Phone is connected UT KX UT series SIP phone is connected SIP General SIP Extension is conn...

Page 706: ...ion 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 22 COS Class of Service Extension PIN Specifies the PIN of the extension CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identificati...

Page 707: ...Manual References 6 1 10 Extension PIN Personal Identification Number Intercept Destination Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Default Not stored V...

Page 708: ...nsion Wired Extension Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy Feature Manual References 10 1 12 Intercept Routing Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy Default Not stored Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Locatio...

Page 709: ...edirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode When this setting is set to 0 the system timer is used Default 0 Value Range 0 240 s Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA Day Lunch ...

Page 710: ...c network to show on the called party s telephone display when making a CO line call Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 15 CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP on Extension CO Selects the CLIP number to show on the call...

Page 711: ... restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party s telephone when making a public network CO line call Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 15 CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation COLR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP...

Page 712: ...20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Two way Recording Specifies whether to enable the two way recording feature for the extension using the Unified Messaging system Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feat...

Page 713: ...ifies the extension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established To enable Wireless XDP Parallel Mode the PS must be turned off once and then turned on after assigning this setting This setting also specifies the sub extension for the main extension of a one numbered extension Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1...

Page 714: ...g call distribution group s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems VPS with DTMF Integration Default Extension number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Transfer Recall Destination Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfe...

Page 715: ...es 16 5 PBX Configuration 8 5 ARS Carrier Feature Manual References 21 1 1 Verification Code Entry 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route Selection Option 2 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Extension Name Spec...

Page 716: ... 1 11 CALL WAITING FEATURES Automatic C Waiting Specifies whether to receive call waiting notifications for calls from a CO line doorphone calls and calls via an incoming call distribution group Default On Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 11 CALL WAITING FEATURES Pickup Dial Set...

Page 717: ...nge Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual References 9 1 6 Hot Line Data Mode Sets or cancels the protection against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication Default Off Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 12 1 ...

Page 718: ...y Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions Default Disable Value Range Disable Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your extension Enable Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your extension Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 8 Call Pickup Call Picku...

Page 719: ...Disable Value Range Disable Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call Enable Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual References 6 1 7 Executive Busy Override Absent Message Specifies the Personal Absent Message which unlike the System Ab...

Page 720: ... Feature Manual References 10 1 14 Intercom Call Option 4 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maint...

Page 721: ...ich an incoming call is answered after going off hook Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will be answered when going off hook Default Ringing Line Value Range No Line No line is selected Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call Ringing Line The longest ringing call is selected PDN The call arri...

Page 722: ...nge Stop Record Keep Record Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual References 20 1 2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES LCS Answer Mode Specifies whether the extension s mailbox is monitored in Hands free or Private mode Default Hands free Value Range Hands free Monitor through the built in speaker Private Monitor through the...

Page 723: ...e extension Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Display Language Selects the display language of the extension telephone Default Language1 Value Range Language1 Language5 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Featur...

Page 724: ...he display to show the call duration automatically after answering a CO line call Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual References 5 1 11 Display Information Key Pad Tone Specifies whether key pad tones are heard when dialing Default On Value Range Off On Maintenance Console ...

Page 725: ...ion Settings Feature Manual References 9 1 1 Hands free Answerback Option 6 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Default Not stored Value Range Max 2...

Page 726: ...ntenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings ICM Tone Selects the ring tone for incoming calls arriving at the INTERCOM button or PDN buttons Note that the ring tone specified here is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension Default 1 Value Range IP PT except KX NT265 KX NT321 1 30 KX NT265 KX NT321 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected r...

Page 727: ...ocation 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual References 15 1 1 Paging Option 7 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the n...

Page 728: ...ode during CO Conversation Selects the function of the FLASH RECALL button during a CO line conversation Default EFA Value Range EFA Terminate Flash Recall Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual References 7 1 2 Flash Recall Terminate 6 1 1 EFA External Feature Access Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of i...

Page 729: ... Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual References 17 1 1 Redial Last Number ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode When Automatic is selected the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the extension s telephone type as follows PT Speech SLT Audio Default Automatic Value Range Automatic Speech Audio Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension...

Page 730: ...ired Extension Extension Settings Group CW w o Tone Ring after Call Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on hook for the previous call Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Extension Ca...

Page 731: ...ging some SLTs require a pause after the first call stops ringing to receive the second call s Caller ID information Default 0 Value Range 0 15 s Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 3 Caller ID SLT MW Mode Enables the use of the Message Waiting Lamp on an SLT extension connected to the extension port...

Page 732: ...tion 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List Wrap up Timer 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Wrap up Timer based on Feature Manual References 10 1 3 ICD Group Features Log in Log out Option 9 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max 5 digits cons...

Page 733: ...t Specifies whether to enable or disable the Communication Assistant CA application for each extension Default Enable Value Range Disable Basic Only Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9 5 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Main Port Number Built in Communication Assistan...

Page 734: ...he extension number of the extension Default Starting at 101 Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Exten...

Page 735: ...0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Manual References 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding FWD Mode for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls reference only Default None Value R...

Page 736: ...Manual References 12 1 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Manual References 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding FWD No Answer Time Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded Default 15 Value Range 0 120 s Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Program...

Page 737: ...tension FWD DND Feature Manual References 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding Remote FWD COS Specifies the COS that allows the FWD setting on the extension to be changed from another extension This COS must then be set for the extensions that will remotely change the FWD setting Default Disable Value Range Disable 1 512 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Ex...

Page 738: ... References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 15 CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation Location Entry Number to Generate Specifies the number of locations to be programmed A CLIP number will only be assigned to connected wired extensions even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of wired extension...

Page 739: ...r Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 12 1 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual Referenc...

Page 740: ...ension Settings CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 15 CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation 740 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings ...

Page 741: ... 2 PBX Configuration 4 1 2 Extension Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Manual References 5 1 13 DND Do Not Disturb 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding Forward DND For internal calls Specifies the FWD DND setting for internal calls If Always All Busy No Answer or Busy No Answer is selected the FWD destination field can be set If For both external calls and internal calls is checked this setting becomes unavail...

Page 742: ... stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 1 3 PBX Configuration 4 1 3 Extension Wired Extension Speed Dial Feature Manual References 18 1 9 Speed Dialing Personal 18 1 10 Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing Personal Number Specifies the number to be dialed by the Personal Speed Dialing number Default Not stored Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secre...

Page 743: ... KX NT505 unit Note Up to 64 KX NT505 units can be connected to the PBX system Copying Flexible Button Settings To copy the flexible button settings of an extension to another extension click Copy to This operation Copy to is available at the User Administrator level Note The Copy to button can be used with KX NT505 units even if the number of connected KX NT505 units differs between extensions Se...

Page 744: ...on will not be able to make or receive calls Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References 12 1 4 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Flexible button data copy Parameter Selection for Single CO Specifies the CO line to be accessed Default 1 Value Range 1 600 Maintenance Console Loc...

Page 745: ...o or logged out from Default None Value Range None The incoming call distribution group is selected manually All All incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to Incoming Group A pre specified incoming call distribution group Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Manual References 10 1 3 ICD Group Features L...

Page 746: ...Switching Mode is set to Automatic Default Table 1 Value Range Table 1 Table 32 or Table 1 Table 128 Note The maximum number of time tables 1 per tenant depends on the System Capacity Selection setting made when the Easy Setup Wizard was run for the PBX If the System Resource Type was selected the maximum number of tenants and therefore time tables is 128 If the SIP Extension Type or IP Extension ...

Page 747: ... Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Extension Number for ICD Group Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Extension Number for Message...

Page 748: ...oup FWD Button Extension Number for Group Fwd External Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or the extension number to set FWD remotely whose CO line calls will be forwarded Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Manual Refer...

Page 749: ...its own call log information Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Extension Number for Log in Log out Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log in to or log out from Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 M...

Page 750: ... the UM group containing the extension s mailbox Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Manual References 20 1 2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES Extension Number for Two way Transfer Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group containing the desired mailbox De...

Page 751: ...extension corresponding to this SDN button Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Manual References 15 1 4 PDN Primary Directory Number SDN Secondary Directory Num...

Page 752: ...on Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 17 4 PBX Configuration 9 4 Private Network NDSS Key Table can be specified here Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Manual References 15 1 14 Private Network Features NDSS Network Direct ...

Page 753: ...tem Resource Type was selected the maximum number of tenants and therefore time tables is 128 If the SIP Extension Type or IP Extension Type was selected the maximum number of tenants is 32 For details refer to 5 4 1 Easy Setup Wizard in the Installation Manual Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Manual References 19 1 3 Tim...

Page 754: ...nces 4 1 7 Call Park Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One touch Two way Transfer For example a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss If the cell is left empty the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits co...

Page 755: ...n be selected To select all extensions at once click Select All When selecting multiple extensions note that if the source extension has an SDN button the copy operation cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 12 1 4 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Flexible button data copy Programming Manual References 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Ext...

Page 756: ...red Value Range Not Stored One Touch Maintenance Console Location 12 1 5 PBX Configuration 4 1 5 Extension Wired Extension PF Button Feature Manual References 7 1 3 Flexible Buttons Dial Specifies the number to be dialed Default Not stored Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 12 1 5 PBX Configuration 4 1 5 Extension Wired Ex...

Page 757: ...ork for the selected extension This setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF to cancel data transmission Default OFF Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 12 1 6 PBX Configuration 4 1 6 Extension Wired Extension NDSS Link Data Send Programming Manual References 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE Table Feature ...

Page 758: ...D Table Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 1 7 PBX Configuration 4 1 7 Extension Wired Extension CLIP ID Table CLIP 1 8 Specifies up to 8 CLIP IDs for the extension Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 12 1 7 PBX Configuration 4 ...

Page 759: ...11 2 PBX Configuration 3 2 Group User Group for more details Main Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Exten...

Page 760: ...e extension user group is used to compose tenants call pickup groups and paging groups Default 1 Value Range 1 256 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 8 1 1 GROUP FEATURES 19 1 2 Tenant Service COS Specifies the COS of the PS Default 1 Value Range 1 512 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configurat...

Page 761: ...t cannot be easily guessed c Changing PINs frequently To change an extension PIN 1 Click Edit under Extension PIN for the extension to change 2 In the window that appears enter the new extension PIN and then enter it again to confirm it 3 Click OK Default Not stored Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Ex...

Page 762: ...ht Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing No Answer and Intercept Routing DND Note that Intercept Routing Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy below Default Not stored Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portab...

Page 763: ...ion number of the PS reference only Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension No Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Ma...

Page 764: ...0 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA Day Lunch Break Night Feature Manual References 10 1 12 Intercept Routing CLIP Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Sta...

Page 765: ...ion 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 15 CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP on Extension CO Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party s telephone Default Extension Value Range Extension Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID CO Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 9 27 PBX Config...

Page 766: ... 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 15 CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation COLR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the PS on the caller s telephone display when answering a call Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Por...

Page 767: ... Recording Specifies whether to enable the two way recording feature for the PS using the Unified Messaging system Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 20 1 90 Unified Messaging Two way Record Two way Transfer Option 1 Extension Number Indicates the extension nu...

Page 768: ...eferences 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension Name Ring Pattern Table Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS Default 1 Value Range 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 10 8 1 PBX Configuration 2 8 1 System Ring Tone Patterns Call from CO 10 8 2 ...

Page 769: ...ature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 10 Call Transfer ARS Itemized Code Specifies the itemized billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made ...

Page 770: ...erences 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension No Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension Name Manual C Waiting fo...

Page 771: ...4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 11 CALL WAITING FEATURES Pickup Dial Set Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature The number specified in Pickup Dial No on this screen is dialed automatically after going off hook when the Hot Line feature is active Default Off Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Port...

Page 772: ...nces 9 1 6 Hot Line Option 3 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension No Extension Name Specifies the ...

Page 773: ...nsion Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 8 Call Pickup Executive Override Deny Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions Default Disable Value Range Disable Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call Enable Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station...

Page 774: ...4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension No Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9 30 PBX Configura...

Page 775: ...ich an incoming call is answered after going off hook Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will be answered when going off hook Default Ringing Line Value Range No Line No line is selected Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call Ringing Line The longest ringing call is selected PDN The call arri...

Page 776: ...l that was being monitored Default Stop Record Value Range Stop Record Keep Record Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 20 1 2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES Option 5 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Mainten...

Page 777: ... language of the PS Default Language1 Value Range Language1 Language5 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 5 1 11 Display Information Incoming Call Display Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the PS s display Default Caller ID Name Value Range Caller ID Name CO Line Name DDI DI...

Page 778: ...play Information Option 6 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension No Extension Name Specifies the nam...

Page 779: ...ue Range No Limitation One touch Dial Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 14 1 8 One touch Dialing Option 7 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 E...

Page 780: ...n 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Flash Mode during CO Conversation Selects the function of the FLASH RECALL button during a CO line conversation Default EFA Value Range EFA Terminate Flash Recall Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 7 1 2 Flash Recall Terminate 6 1 1 EFA External Fea...

Page 781: ...2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 17 1 1 Redial Last Number ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode When Automatic is selected the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the type of the PS Default Automatic Value Range Automatic Speech Audio Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Fe...

Page 782: ...ation 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Extension Name Group CW w o Tone Ring after Call Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on hook for the previous call Default...

Page 783: ...l Distribution Group Group Settings Member List Wrap up Timer 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Wrap up Timer based on Feature Manual References 10 1 3 ICD Group Features Log in Log out Option 9 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance ...

Page 784: ...on 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 15 1 4 PDN Primary Directory Number SDN Secondary Directory Number Extension Built in Communication Assistant Specifies whether to enable or disable the Communication Assistant CA application for each extension Default Enable Value Range Disable Basic Only Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4...

Page 785: ...h PS can be referred FWD and DND settings can be programmed separately for each PS in 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Program...

Page 786: ...n Extension Settings Programming Manual References 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Manual References 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding FWD Destination for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming CO line calls reference only Default Not stored Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PB...

Page 787: ...ination for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls reference only Default Not stored Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Featu...

Page 788: ...ble Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 12 2 2 PBX Configuration 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Manual References 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding Remote FWD COS Specifies the COS that allows the FWD setting on the extension to be changed from another extension ...

Page 789: ...onfiguration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Manual References 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 789 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings ...

Page 790: ... PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 15 CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation Location Entry Number to Generate Specifies the number of locations to be programmed A CLIP number will only be assigned to registered PS extensions even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of PS extensions Default 0 Value Rang...

Page 791: ... Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 12 2 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual Referen...

Page 792: ...nsion Settings CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Manual References 4 1 15 CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation 792 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings ...

Page 793: ...ation 4 2 2 Extension Portable Station FWD DND Feature Manual References 5 1 13 DND Do Not Disturb 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding Forward DND For internal calls Specifies the FWD DND setting for internal calls If Always All Busy No Answer or Busy No Answer is selected the FWD destination field can be set If For both external calls and internal calls is checked this setting becomes unavailable and the v...

Page 794: ...up Fwd Both Group Fwd External Group Fwd Internal Account Conference Terminate EFA Call Park Log in Log out Hurry up Wrap up Time Service TRS Level Change CLIR COLR Time Service Automatic Manual Two way Record Two way Transfer LCS Voice Mail Transfer NDSS CTI PDN SDN Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References...

Page 795: ...tion 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Manual References 4 1 7 Call Park Parameter Selection for Log in Log out Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to are logged in to or logged out from Default None Value Range None The incoming call distribution group is selected manually All All incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to Inc...

Page 796: ...S Level Change Specifies the TRS level to be used temporarily on a certain PS Default Level 1 Value Range Level 1 Level 7 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Manual References 19 1 5 TRS Toll Restriction 5 1 6 Dial Tone Transfer Parameter Selection for Time Service Automatic Manual Specifies the Time Table to be used when t...

Page 797: ...rtable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 4 System Wireless SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD Feature Manual References 15 1 4 PDN Primary Directory Number SDN Secondary Directory Number Extension Extension Number for DSS Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting o...

Page 798: ...wd Both Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or the extension number to set FWD remotely whose intercom and CO line calls will be forwarded Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Manual References 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding 7...

Page 799: ... 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Manual References 7 1 6 FWD Call Forwarding 7 1 7 FWD DND Button Group FWD Button Extension Number for Log in Log out Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log in to or log out from Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration ...

Page 800: ...nsole Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Manual References 20 1 2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES Extension Number for Two way Transfer Specifies the floating extension number of the UM group containing the desired mailbox Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Exte...

Page 801: ... must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Manual References 15 1 4 PDN Primary Directory Number SDN Secondary Directory Number Extension Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extensi...

Page 802: ...n 17 4 PBX Configuration 9 4 Private Network NDSS Key Table can be specified here Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Manual References 15 1 14 Private Network Features NDSS Network Direct Station Selection Optional Parameter or Ringing Tone Type Number for Time...

Page 803: ... of Mailbox for Two way Transfer Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One touch Two way Transfer For example a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss If the cell is left empty the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance...

Page 804: ... PSs at once click Select All When selecting multiple extensions note that if the source extension has an SDN button the copy operation cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 12 2 3 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Flexible button data copy Programming Manual References 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button 804 PC Pr...

Page 805: ... for the selected extension This setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF to cancel data transmission Default OFF Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 12 2 4 PBX Configuration 4 2 4 Extension Portable Station NDSS Link Data Send Programming Manual References 17 4 PBX Configuration 9 4 Private Network NDSS Key Table Featu...

Page 806: ... ID Table Extension Name Indicates the name of the PS reference only Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 2 5 PBX Configuration 4 2 5 Extension Portable Station CLIP ID Table CLIP 1 8 Specifies up to 8 CLIP IDs for the PS Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 12 2 5 PBX Configuration 4 2 5 Extensi...

Page 807: ...nce Console Location 12 2 6 PBX Configuration 4 2 6 Extension Portable Station Single CO Appearance Programming Manual References 9 31 PBX Configuration 1 3 Configuration Option System Wireless CO Status Display in Standby KX WT125 126 only Need System Restart 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Key Setting Parameter Selection for Single CO 18 1 PBX Configurat...

Page 808: ...figuration Slot Legacy GW1 Legacy GW2 Unless noted otherwise the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX Refer to the corresponding Extension DSS Console section in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for more information To copy DSS Console setting values from one location to another click the Copy to button Once DSS ...

Page 809: ...5 Optional Device This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Optional Device menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 809 ...

Page 810: ... reference only Default Current doorphone number Value Range Doorphone number Maintenance Console Location 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone Feature Manual References 5 1 15 Doorphone Call Name Specifies the doorphone name Default Door Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone Feature Manual References 5 1 15 ...

Page 811: ...urce Type was selected the maximum number of tenants and therefore time tables is 128 If the SIP Extension Type or IP Extension Type was selected the maximum number of tenants is 32 For details refer to 5 4 1 Easy Setup Wizard in the Installation Manual Maintenance Console Location 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone Programming Manual References 10 4 PBX Configuration 2 4 System ...

Page 812: ...f a UM group The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting message to the caller Default None Value Range None 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone Feature Manual References 5 1 15 Doorphone Call 20 1 2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES VM Trunk Group No Specifies the number of the VM trunk group se...

Page 813: ...Value Range 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 813 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone ...

Page 814: ... 2 PBX Configuration 5 2 Optional Device External Pager Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the external pager Default 1 600 Others Not Stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 13 2 PBX Configuration 5 2 Optional Device External Pager Feature Manual References 15 1 1 Paging 19 1 1 TAFAS Trunk Answer From Any Station 3 1 2 BGM B...

Page 815: ...5 2 Optional Device External Pager Feature Manual References 15 1 1 Paging 19 1 1 TAFAS Trunk Answer From Any Station 3 1 2 BGM Background Music Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 815 13 2 PBX Configuration 5 2 Optional Device External Pager ...

Page 816: ...Default Trunk Value Range None Intercom calls TIE line calls and CO line calls can be made Trunk Intercom calls and TIE line calls without PBX code can be made TIE line calls with PBX code and CO line calls are restricted All All calls are restricted Maintenance Console Location 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Optional Device Voice Message DISA System Feature Manual References 22 1 1 Walking COS 21...

Page 817: ...3 1 Optional Device Voice Message DISA System DISA Intercept Intercept when No Dial after DISA answers Selects how DISA calls are handled if the caller does not select any option from the menu Default to Operator Value Range to Operator to AA 0 to AA 9 Disable Reorder Tone Maintenance Console Location 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Optional Device Voice Message DISA System CO CO with DISA DISA to ...

Page 818: ...e will free up DISA ports faster but prevent DISA being used to detect the end of a call and disconnect the CO line quickly Default Disable Release DISA Value Range Disable Release DISA The DISA port is released when a CO line to private CO line call using DISA is established Enable DISA stays connected for the duration of the call to allow detection of the end of the call Maintenance Console Loca...

Page 819: ... to detect the end of the call Maintenance Console Location 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Optional Device Voice Message DISA System Programming Manual References 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Optional Device Voice Message DISA System Option 1 CO CO with DISA DISA to Private Network CO CO with DISA Transfer by DTMF Activation Key Required Specifies whether an outside party such as a cellular phon...

Page 820: ...tion 2 Timed Reminder Message Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the pre recorded message to play when a Timed Reminder call is answered in each time mode Default None Value Range None 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Optional Device Voice Message DISA System Programming Manual References 13 3 2 PBX Configuration 5 3 2 Optional Device Voice Message DISA Message Feature...

Page 821: ...Device Voice Message DISA Message Feature Manual References 14 1 2 OGM Outgoing Message 5 1 10 DISA Direct Inward System Access 7 1 5 Floating Extension Name Specifies the name of the OGM Default OGM 01 64 DISA 01 DISA 64 Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 3 2 PBX Configuration 5 3 2 Optional Device Voice Message DISA Message Feature Manual References 14 1 2 OGM Outgoing...

Page 822: ...n 13 3 2 PBX Configuration 5 3 2 Optional Device Voice Message DISA Message Programming Manual References 13 3 1 PBX Configuration 5 3 1 Optional Device Voice Message DISA System Feature Manual References 5 1 10 DISA Direct Inward System Access Fax Extension Specifies the extension number to which to transfer a call when a fax signal is detected Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisti...

Page 823: ...Feature Manual References 2 1 6 Automatic Fax Transfer Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 823 13 3 2 PBX Configuration 5 3 2 Optional Device Voice Message DISA Message ...

Page 824: ...figuration Slot External Relay No Indicates the number of the external relay reference only Default 1 80 Value Range 1 80 Maintenance Console Location 13 4 PBX Configuration 5 4 Optional Device External Relay Feature Manual References 6 1 11 External Relay Name Specifies the relay name Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 4 PBX Configuration 5 4 Optional...

Page 825: ... to activate relays Default 1 Value Range 1 512 Maintenance Console Location 13 4 PBX Configuration 5 4 Optional Device External Relay Programming Manual References 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Optional Device Other Extensions External Relay Access Feature Manual References 10 1 15 Internal Call Block 6 1 11 External Relay Document Version 2016 03 PC Programm...

Page 826: ...rnal sensor reference only Default 1 80 Value Range 1 80 Maintenance Console Location 13 5 PBX Configuration 5 5 Optional Device External Sensor Feature Manual References 6 1 12 External Sensor Name Specifies the sensor name Default Sensor Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 5 PBX Configuration 5 5 Optional Device External Sensor Feature Manual References 6 1 12 External ...

Page 827: ...BX If the System Resource Type was selected the maximum number of tenants is 128 If the SIP Extension Type or IP Extension Type was selected the maximum number of tenants is 32 For details refer to 5 4 1 Easy Setup Wizard in the Installation Manual Maintenance Console Location 13 5 PBX Configuration 5 5 Optional Device External Sensor Programming Manual References 10 4 PBX Configuration 2 4 System...

Page 828: ...ation 13 5 PBX Configuration 5 5 Optional Device External Sensor Feature Manual References 6 1 12 External Sensor 19 1 2 Tenant Service Sensor Alarm Email Comment Specifies comments in the e mail received when the sensor detects an alarm Default Not stored Value Range Max 256 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 5 PBX Configuration 5 5 Optional Device External Sensor Feature Manual Reference...

Page 829: ...uration 6 Feature This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Feature menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 829 ...

Page 830: ...onal tables Note If Expansion for Tenant is selected and the PBX has been setup using the System Resource Type configuration a maximum of 300 System Speed Dialing numbers can be saved for each tenant For details refer to 5 4 1 Easy Setup Wizard in the Installation Manual The maximum number of time tables 1 per tenant depends on the System Capacity Selection setting made when the Easy Setup Wizard ...

Page 831: ...ation 14 1 PBX Configuration 6 1 Feature System Speed Dial Feature Manual References 18 1 9 Speed Dialing Personal 18 1 10 Speed Dialing System 4 1 3 Caller ID CLI Destination Specifies the CLI destination extension to which incoming calls from the programmed telephone number are routed If a Caller ID Modification Table is being used the modified number must match the telephone number above CO Lin...

Page 832: ...DIL Day Lunch Break Night 18 3 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table CLI Ring for DDI DID Day Lunch Break Night Feature Manual References 4 1 14 CLI Calling Line Identification Distribution 4 1 3 Caller ID 832 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 14 1 PBX Configuration 6 1 Feature System Speed Dial ...

Page 833: ...s Control SMDR for External Hotel Application 1 Room Status Control Selects whether check in and check out data is output on SMDR Default No Print Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Programming Manual References 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Manual References 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording 17 1 3 Roo...

Page 834: ... be entered in its place when the message is selected from an extension This character can be used a maximum of seven times in a Printing Message Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Programming Manual References 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Manual References 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail...

Page 835: ...characters Maintenance Console Location 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Feature Manual References 19 1 4 Timed Reminder Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 835 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel ...

Page 836: ...3 PBX Configuration 6 3 Feature Verification Code Feature Manual References 21 1 1 Verification Code Entry User Name Specifies the user name assigned to the verification code Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 14 3 PBX Configuration 6 3 Feature Verification Code Feature Manual References 21 1 1 Verification Code Entry Verification Code PIN Specifies the P...

Page 837: ...fies the COS that applies when making a CO line call with the verification code Default 1 Value Range 1 512 Maintenance Console Location 14 3 PBX Configuration 6 3 Feature Verification Code Programming Manual References 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Feature Manual References 21 1 1 Verification Code Entry 4 1 22 COS Class of Service Itemized Billing Code for A...

Page 838: ... PBX Configuration 6 3 Feature Verification Code Programming Manual References 16 5 PBX Configuration 8 5 ARS Carrier Feature Manual References 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route Selection 838 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 14 3 PBX Configuration 6 3 Feature Verification Code ...

Page 839: ...he applicable tab Second Dial Tone Waiting Code Specifies the Second Dial Tone Waiting code Default Not stored Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 14 4 PBX Configuration 6 4 Feature Second Dial Tone Feature Manual References 15 1 2 Pause Insertion Pause Repeating Counter Specifies the number of pauses to be inserted when waiting for the second dial tone Defa...

Page 840: ...ponds to the absent message To use both features in synchronization you must record a corresponding greeting for each absent message changed For details about changing UM system prompts see 7 9 Utility UM System Prompts Customization Absent Message Specifies the message for display Default 1 Will Return Soon 2 Gone Home 3 At Ext Extension Number 4 Back at Hour Minute 5 Out until Month Day 6 In a M...

Page 841: ... audio source to be used for Music on Hold Default Same as System Setting Value Range Same as System Setting BGM1 BGM2 BGM3 BGM4 BGM5 BGM6 BGM7 BGM8 Tone Maintenance Console Location 14 6 PBX Configuration 6 6 Feature Tenant Programming Manual References 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM Feature Manual References 13 1 4 Music on Hold 19 1 2 Tenant Service Operator Extension Number Spe...

Page 842: ...intenance Console Location 14 6 PBX Configuration 6 6 Feature Tenant Programming Manual References 16 1 PBX Configuration 8 1 ARS System Setting Feature Manual References 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route Selection 19 1 2 Tenant Service System Speed Dial Specifies which system speed dialing table is used by the tenant Default Same as System Setting Value Range Same as System Setting PBX common system spee...

Page 843: ... Configuration 6 6 Feature Tenant Feature Manual References 19 1 2 Tenant Service 19 1 3 Time Service Extension Directory Specifies whether the display for the Speed Dialing numbers is for the entire system or only for the extensions of the tenant group that the extension belongs to Default System Value Range System All system Speed Dialing numbers are displayed Tenant Only the extensions of the t...

Page 844: ...844 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 14 6 PBX Configuration 6 6 Feature Tenant ...

Page 845: ...nfiguration 7 TRS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the TRS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 845 ...

Page 846: ... applicable Denied Code tables the call is made A maximum of 100 denied codes can be programmed for each level 20 codes are displayed at a time To display other sets of codes click the applicable tab Level 2 Level 6 Specifies the leading digits of toll restricted numbers for each level Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and X Maintenance Console Location 15 1 PBX Config...

Page 847: ...de tables and if a match is found the call is made A maximum of 100 exception codes can be programmed for each level 20 codes are displayed at a time To display other sets of codes click the applicable tab Level 2 Level 6 Specifies the leading digits of the numbers to be exempted from toll restriction for each level Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and X Maintenance C...

Page 848: ...in the dialed number TRS will look only at the following digits A maximum of 100 Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed Special Carrier Access Code Specifies a Special Carrier Access Code Special Carrier Access Codes and Host PBX Access codes should be unique Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 15 3 PBX Configuration 7 3 TRS Speci...

Page 849: ...n emergency number it can be dialed regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension Calls can be made to 911 without entering a CO Line Access number Emergency Number Specifies the numbers used for making emergency calls It is not necessary to start the emergency number with a CO Line Access number Default 1 10 Not stored Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer P Pause and F...

Page 850: ...4 1 PBX Configuration 6 1 Feature System Speed Dial Feature Manual References 19 1 5 TRS Toll Restriction TRS Check for Dial Enables a TRS check for the user dialed and This is useful in preventing unauthorized calls which could possibly be made through certain telephone company exchanges Default No Check Value Range No Check Check Maintenance Console Location 15 5 PBX Configuration 7 5 TRS Miscel...

Page 851: ...h can be dialed after an extension user receives a CO line call If the number of dialed digits exceeds the programmed limit the line will be disconnected Default None Value Range None 1 7 Maintenance Console Location 15 5 PBX Configuration 7 5 TRS Miscellaneous Feature Manual References 19 1 5 TRS Toll Restriction 4 1 17 CO Line Call Limitation TRS Check after EFA Enables TRS to check the digits d...

Page 852: ...ble 2_N Except Table N_6 The Denied Code Tables for the higher levels are applied to all levels below it and the Exception Code Tables for the lower levels are applied to all levels above it Deny Table N Except Table N Each level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes which are only applied to that level Maintenance Console Location 15 5 PBX Configuration 7 5 TRS Miscellaneou...

Page 853: ...nfiguration 8 ARS This section serves as reference operating instructions for the ARS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 853 ...

Page 854: ... call using Idle Line Access CO Line Access or S CO Line Access method Maintenance Console Location 16 1 PBX Configuration 8 1 ARS System Setting Feature Manual References 4 1 16 CO Line Access 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route Selection Mode When Any Carrier is not programmed for the Dial Selects what happens when the dialed number is not found in Leading Number in 16 2 PBX Configuration 8 2 ARS Leading ...

Page 855: ...e user dialed number excluding the leading number 100 leading numbers are displayed at a time To display other sets of leading numbers click the applicable tab Leading Number Specifies the leading number Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and X Maintenance Console Location 16 2 PBX Configuration 8 2 ARS Leading Number Feature Manual References 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route ...

Page 856: ...leading number Default 1 Value Range 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 16 2 PBX Configuration 8 2 ARS Leading Number Feature Manual References 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route Selection 856 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 16 2 PBX Configuration 8 2 ARS Leading Number ...

Page 857: ...its own time blocks Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list To adjust the currently displayed Routing Plan click and drag the divisions between two time periods To program the time blocks of the currently displayed Routing Plan including adding or deleting time blocks click Time Setting Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 857 16 3 PBX Configuration 8 3 AR...

Page 858: ...X Configuration 8 3 ARS Routing Plan Time Time Setting Feature Manual References 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route Selection Time A D Hour Minute Specifies the start time for each time block Note Time A must be the earliest block in the day and the following blocks must be set in chronological order Correct programming example Time A 8 00 Time B 17 00 Time C 21 00 Incorrect programming example Time A 8 00...

Page 859: ...1 PBX Configuration 8 3 ARS Routing Plan Time Time Setting Feature Manual References 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route Selection Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 859 16 3 1 PBX Configuration 8 3 ARS Routing Plan Time Time Setting ...

Page 860: ...clicking the applicable tab Time A Time D Specifies the carrier to be given priority for each time zone Default Routing Plan 1 10 Priority 1 Routing Plan no Priority 2 6 None Routing Plan 11 48 Priority 1 6 None Value Range None 1 128 Maintenance Console Location 16 4 PBX Configuration 8 4 ARS Routing Plan Priority Feature Manual References 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route Selection 860 PC Programming Ma...

Page 861: ...8 5 ARS Carrier Feature Manual References 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route Selection Removed Number of Digits Specifies the number of leading digits to remove from the user dialed number Default 0 Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 16 5 PBX Configuration 8 5 ARS Carrier Feature Manual References 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route Selection Modify Command Specifies the commands to modify the user dialed...

Page 862: ...n Portable Station CLIP ID Table Default 1 Value Range 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 16 5 PBX Configuration 8 5 ARS Carrier Feature Manual References 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route Selection Carrier Access Code Specifies the carrier access code The carrier access code can be added to the user dialed number by specifying C in Modify Command on this screen Default Not stored Value Range Max 32 digits ...

Page 863: ...r TRG 01 TRG 96 Enables each trunk group for each carrier If a cell is highlighted in blue that trunk group is enabled for use with that carrier Default TRG 01 04 ON All other trunk groups OFF Value Range OFF white ON blue Maintenance Console Location 16 5 PBX Configuration 8 5 ARS Carrier Feature Manual References 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route Selection Authorization Code for Tenant Specifies an Auth...

Page 864: ...imum number of tenants is 128 If the SIP Extension Type or IP Extension Type was selected the maximum number of tenants is 32 For details refer to 5 4 1 Easy Setup Wizard in the Installation Manual Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 16 5 PBX Configuration 8 5 ARS Carrier Feature Manual References 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route Selection 19 1 ...

Page 865: ...rent leading number exceptions can be programmed 20 leading number exception entries are displayed on the screen at a time To display other sets click the applicable tab Leading Number Exception Specifies the leading number exception Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and X Maintenance Console Location 16 6 PBX Configuration 8 6 ARS Leading Number Exception Feature Manu...

Page 866: ...e To display other groups click the applicable tab TRG TRG 01 TRG 96 Specifies the Authorization code of each carrier for each trunk group Default Not stored Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 16 7 PBX Configuration 8 7 ARS Authorization Code for TRG Programming Manual References 16 5 PBX Configuration 8 5 ARS Carrier Carrier Modify Command Feature Manual ...

Page 867: ...9 Private Network This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Private Network menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 867 ...

Page 868: ...s from a total of 8 are displayed at a time To display other priority sets click the applicable tab Using a private network up to 8 PBXs can share one voice mail system centralized VM connected to another PBX This can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network Own PBX Code Specifies the PBX code of the local PBX when using PBX Code Method numbering on a TIE line n...

Page 869: ...ance Console Location 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE Table Feature Manual References 15 1 12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the dialed number in place of the removed digits for each priority Default Not stored Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE...

Page 870: ...s the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of other PBXs in the TIE line network Default No 1 1 No 2 2 No 3 3 No 4 4 No 5 5 No 6 6 No 7 7 No 8 8 No 9 9 No 10 0 No 11 32 Not stored Value Range Max 3 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE Table Feature Manual References 15 1 22 Private Network Features QSIG E...

Page 871: ...ed to extensions connected to other PBXs in the network Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE Table Feature Manual References 15 1 22 Private Network Features QSIG Enhanced Features Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 871 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE Table ...

Page 872: ...X each within a network Assigning the same Network ID to two PBXs will cause network data transmission problems Changing this value in On line mode will automatically clear any NDSS Link Data Default 0 Value Range 0 The PBX retransmits BLF data sent by other PBXs 1 The PBX receives BLF data sent by other PBXs 2 8 The PBX transmits BLF data over the network Maintenance Console Location 17 2 PBX Con...

Page 873: ... 2 Private Network Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References 17 3 PBX Configuration 9 3 Private Network Network Operator VoIP IP GW Card Slot No to notify BLF data to Network Operator Feature Manual References 15 1 14 Private Network Features NDSS Network Direct Station Selection Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature Data Transmission Counter Specifies the maximu...

Page 874: ...Features NDSS Network Direct Station Selection Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralized VM Feature Data Re transmission Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times re transmission of network message waiting notifications is repeated before being canceled Default 3 Value Range 0 10 Maintenance Console Location 17 2 PBX Configuration 9 2 Private Network Network Data Transmission Programming Ma...

Page 875: ...tenance Console Location 17 2 PBX Configuration 9 2 Private Network Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE Table Enhanced QSIG Call Information Activation Key Required Feature Manual References 15 1 13 Private Network Features Centralized Voice Mail Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 875 17 2 PBX Configuration 9 2 Private ...

Page 876: ...rk Data Transmission Any extension at the monitor PBX can be specified here Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 17 3 PBX Configuration 9 3 Private Network Network Operator VoIP Programming Manual References 17 2 PBX Configuration 9 2 Private Network Network Data Transmission Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature Netwo...

Page 877: ...ue Range Undefined Shelf No Slot No Maintenance Console Location 17 3 PBX Configuration 9 3 Private Network Network Operator VoIP Programming Manual References 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Feature Manual References 15 1 14 Private Network Features NDSS Network Direct Station Selection Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 877 17 3 PBX Configuration 9 3 Private Network Netw...

Page 878: ...tension attached to another PBX that will be monitored The number input here can use either Extension Number Method or PBX Code Method Default Not stored Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 17 4 PBX Configuration 9 4 Private Network NDSS Key Table Feature Manual References 15 1 12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES 15 1 14 Private Network Features NDSS Network Direct...

Page 879: ... Console Location 17 4 PBX Configuration 9 4 Private Network NDSS Key Table Programming Manual References 17 2 PBX Configuration 9 2 Private Network Network Data Transmission Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature Network PBX ID Feature Manual References 15 1 14 Private Network Features NDSS Network Direct Station Selection Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 879 17 ...

Page 880: ...ecifies the floating extension number of the centralized UM or VM VPS group This floating extension number must start with the number used to access a TIE line or the extensions of another PBX Default Not stored Value Range Max 8 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 17 5 PBX Configuration 9 5 Private Network Centralized UM VM Unit Group Name 20 characters Specifies the name of the...

Page 881: ...0 CO Incoming Call This section serves as reference operating instructions for the CO Incoming Call menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 881 ...

Page 882: ...PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings CO Name Specifies the CO line name which is shown on the extension s display when receiving a call from the CO line Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Feature Manual References 5 1 11 Display Information Trunk Group Number Specifies the t...

Page 883: ...tion 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings Feature Manual References 8 1 1 GROUP FEATURES Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 883 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings ...

Page 884: ...o be programmed for each CO line To assign DIL destination numbers enter directly or click Destination Setting see 2 1 7 Extension Number Setting The Site Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Type Indicates the CO line card type reference only Default Current card t...

Page 885: ...s Maintenance Console Location 18 2 PBX Configuration 10 2 CO Incoming Call DIL Table Port Settings Feature Manual References 10 1 11 INCOMING CALL FEATURES DIL Destination Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the DIL destination in each time mode Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 18 2 PBX Configuration 10 2 CO Incoming Call DIL Table Port Settin...

Page 886: ...ration 10 2 CO Incoming Call DIL Table Port Settings Feature Manual References 5 1 8 DIL Direct In Line 19 1 2 Tenant Service 19 1 3 Time Service UM Service Group No Specifies the Service Group number sent to the Unified Messaging system when the incoming call destination is the floating extension number of a UM group The Service Group number is used to allow the Unified Messaging system to send t...

Page 887: ...on number is found in the System Speed Dialing Table CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode day lunch break night on a CO line basis The Site Shelf Slot and Port for each item are displayed for your reference For details see Common Programming Reference Items in 9 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Type Indicates the CO line card type reference only Default Cur...

Page 888: ... line through which the calls arrive DDI DID Distribution depends on the DID number of the calls Maintenance Console Location 18 2 PBX Configuration 10 2 CO Incoming Call DIL Table Port Settings Feature Manual References 10 1 11 INCOMING CALL FEATURES CLI Ring for DIL Day Lunch Break Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Loc...

Page 889: ...ort Settings Feature Manual References 10 1 11 INCOMING CALL FEATURES Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each CO line reference only Default Current networking type Value Range Public Private TIE VPN Maintenance Console Location 18 2 PBX Configuration 10 2 CO Incoming Call DIL Table Port Settings Feature Manual References 10 1 11 INCOMING CALL FEATURES 15 1 12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES...

Page 890: ... 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 18 2 PBX Configuration 10 2 CO Incoming Call DIL Table Port Settings Feature Manual References 5 1 7 DID Direct Inward Dialing 15 1 12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES DDI DID TIE Additional Dial Specifies the number to be added to the incoming called number in the place of the removed digits for DID distribution or for TIE line service Default Not stored Value Range Max...

Page 891: ...15 1 12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 891 18 2 PBX Configuration 10 2 CO Incoming Call DIL Table Port Settings ...

Page 892: ... or click Destination Setting see 2 1 7 Extension Number Setting It is possible to program DID numbers and DID destinations in each time mode day lunch break night for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Automatic Registration or to program DID names for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Name Generate DDI DID Number Specifies the DID number Default Not stored Value Rang...

Page 893: ...oming Call DDI DID Table Programming Manual References 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main 18 3 1 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Automatic Registration Feature Manual References 5 1 7 DID Direct Inward Dialing 15 1 12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending o...

Page 894: ...e Unified Messaging system to send the applicable greeting message to the caller Default Not Stored Value Range None 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 18 3 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Feature Manual References 5 1 7 DID Direct Inward Dialing 20 1 2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES VM Trunk Group No Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the incoming cal...

Page 895: ...8 3 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Programming Manual References 14 1 PBX Configuration 6 1 Feature System Speed Dial Feature Manual References 5 1 7 DID Direct Inward Dialing 4 1 14 CLI Calling Line Identification Distribution Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 895 18 3 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table ...

Page 896: ...ll DDI DID Table Feature Manual References 5 1 7 DID Direct Inward Dialing Generate DDI DID Number From Specifies the DID number of the first location to be programmed DID numbers for subsequent locations will be generated automatically by adding one to the value of the previous location Default Not Stored Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 18 3 1 PBX Configur...

Page 897: ...locations for a certain time mode click the appropriate Same all check box If the Same all check box for a certain time mode is not clicked the destination numbers for subsequent locations will be generated automatically by adding one to the value of the previous location for that time mode Default Not Stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 18 3 1 PBX Config...

Page 898: ... DID Table Name Generate Programming Manual References 18 3 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Feature Manual References 5 1 7 DID Direct Inward Dialing Number to Generate Specifies the number of locations to be programmed Default Not Stored Value Range 1 1000 Maintenance Console Location 18 3 2 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Name Generate Programming Manu...

Page 899: ...rd Dialing Name Prefix Specifies the text to be included at the start of each DID name Default Not Stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 18 3 2 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Name Generate Programming Manual References 18 3 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Feature Manual References 5 1 7 DID Direct Inward Dialing Name Suffix S...

Page 900: ...all DDI DID Table Name Generate Programming Manual References 18 3 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Feature Manual References 5 1 7 DID Direct Inward Dialing 900 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 18 3 2 PBX Configuration 10 3 CO Incoming Call DDI DID Table Name Generate ...

Page 901: ...O Incoming Call Miscellaneous Feature Manual References 10 1 12 Intercept Routing 5 1 13 DND Do Not Disturb Intercept Routing to Operator No Destination Destination is not programmed Enables the Intercept Routing No Destination feature to activate when there is no destination for the call Default Enable Value Range Disable Reorder Tone Sends a reorder tone to the caller However a call through an L...

Page 902: ...e Console Location 18 4 PBX Configuration 10 5 CO Incoming Call Miscellaneous Feature Manual References 10 1 13 Intercept Routing No Destination 902 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 18 4 PBX Configuration 10 5 CO Incoming Call Miscellaneous ...

Page 903: ...ion 11 Maintenance This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Maintenance menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 903 ...

Page 904: ...ain Feature Manual References 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Format Port Selects the Serial Interface port that is used to output the SMDR data Default RS 232C Value Range None LAN TELNET RS 232C Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Manual References 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Format Page Length Number of Lines ...

Page 905: ...intenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Manual References 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Format Date Format Selects the printed date format Default MM DD YY Value Range MM DD YY DD MM YY YY MM DD YY DD MM Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Manual References 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail R...

Page 906: ...1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Programming Manual References 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings CO SMDR Outgoing CO Call Printout SMDR Feature Manual References 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Print Information Incoming Call Specifies whether the information relating to incoming CO line calls such as caller s identification name and number i...

Page 907: ...ording Print Information Log in Log out Specifies whether the log in log out status is printed Default No Print Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Manual References 10 1 3 ICD Group Features Log in Log out 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Print Information Hotel Room Status Selects whether check in and check out ...

Page 908: ...Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Programming Manual References 14 2 PBX Configuration 6 2 Feature Hotel Feature Manual References 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording 19 1 4 Timed Reminder Print Information Error Log Specifies whether PBX error log information is output to SMDR Default No Print Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Co...

Page 909: ...ny from a Host PBX 2 1 3 ARS Automatic Route Selection 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Option Caller ID Number Name Selects the printing format of caller identifications for incoming CO line calls Default Number Value Range None Number Name Name Number Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Manual References 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail...

Page 910: ...e Detail Recording Option Privacy Mode Selects whether private dialing is enabled or disabled and how many digits to hide when enabled To enable this setting Print Information Outgoing Call on the SMDR tab should be set to Print Default No Print Value Range Print Dialed Number Disables private dialing all dialed numbers are shown on SMDR No Print No dialed number will be shown on SMDR Print X Prin...

Page 911: ...ifies whether the time of answering an incoming CO line call is printed Default No Print Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Manual References 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Option Caller ID Modification Specifies whether Caller ID numbers are recorded on SMDR as received before being modified by the PBX or afte...

Page 912: ...ue Range End of Call Start and End of Call Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Manual References 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording LAN SMDR Port Number Specifies the port number used to output SMDR data via the LAN Default 2300 Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Manual Refere...

Page 913: ... Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Manual References 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording RS 232C Communication Baud Rate Specifies the data transmission speed from the PBX to the printer or personal computer To ensure stable transmission when changing this setting to 57600 or 115200 bps set Communication Flow on this screen to Hardware Default 19200 bps...

Page 914: ...dd Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Manual References 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Communication Flow Enables the hardware flow control Default None Value Range None Hardware Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Communication NL Code Specifies the NL New Line code for the printer or personal compu...

Page 915: ...ty Bit Mark Stop Bit 2 bit Word Length 8 bit Parity Bit Space Stop Bit 2 bit Default 8 bit Value Range 7 bit 8 bit Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Manual References 18 1 6 SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Communication Stop Bit Selects a stop bit code that indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character Select an appropriate value...

Page 916: ...tects a PBX error the System Alarm button on the PT turns on red When this button is pressed the display will show the error number and the button light will turn off automatically Default Not stored Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Manual References 12 1 4 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time Set ...

Page 917: ...ntenance Console Location 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main Feature Manual References 12 1 4 Local Alarm Information Error Log for UM Port Busy Detection of All UM Port Busy Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if UM ports were all busy specified in Detection of All UM Port Busy This item is recorded by Syslog If this Log is frequently recorded in your customer it indicates...

Page 918: ...VM Network MSW Transmission Counter Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if network message waiting information is deleted after re transmission is repeated for the number of times specified in Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralized VM Feature Data Re transmission Repeat Counter in 17 2 PBX Configuration 9 2 Private Network Network Data Transmission Default Disable Value Range ...

Page 919: ...n 9 1 Private Network TIE Table Enhanced QSIG Call Information Activation Key Required Feature Manual References 15 1 13 Private Network Features Centralized Voice Mail Password Passwords authorize the user to program the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal computer Manager Password PT Programming Prog 1 Specifies the manager password to authorize the PT user to access manager programming ...

Page 920: ...tem CSs connected to legacy gateways must be registered to Air Synchronization Group Number 1 Do not register CSs connected to legacy gateways to any other Air Synchronization Group Number Adding CSs Follow the steps below to add CSs to the air synchronization group 1 Connect the CS to be registered to the network and if necessary the power supply 2 Click Add A dialog box will appear Non registere...

Page 921: ...tion Indicates the port status To change the status of the port click the desired cell in the column and then select INS or OUS for the port Default Current status Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 19 2 1 PBX Configuration 11 2 1 Maintenance CS Synchronization Air Synchronization S...

Page 922: ...CS Synchronization Air Synchronization Primary CS Index Specifies the number of the primary CS Default Not applicable Value Range 1 16 Maintenance Console Location 19 2 1 PBX Configuration 11 2 1 Maintenance CS Synchronization Air Synchronization Primary CS Slot Indicates the slot position of the primary CS reference only Default Current slot number Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Loca...

Page 923: ...onsole Location 19 2 1 PBX Configuration 11 2 1 Maintenance CS Synchronization Air Synchronization Secondary CS Index Specifies the number of the secondary CS Default Not applicable Value Range 1 16 Maintenance Console Location 19 2 1 PBX Configuration 11 2 1 Maintenance CS Synchronization Air Synchronization Secondary CS Slot Indicates the slot position of the secondary CS reference only Default ...

Page 924: ...Location 19 2 1 PBX Configuration 11 2 1 Maintenance CS Synchronization Air Synchronization Secondary CS CS Name Indicates the name of the secondary CS reference only Default Not applicable Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 19 2 1 PBX Configuration 11 2 1 Maintenance CS Synchronization Air Synchronization 924 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 19 2 1 PBX Config...

Page 925: ... the LAN synchronization group 1 Connect the CS to be registered to the network and if necessary the power supply 2 Click Add A dialog box will appear Non registered available CSs are displayed on the left 3 Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for addition 4 Click OK Deleting CSs Follow the steps below to delete CSs from the LAN synchronization group 1 Click Delete A dialog box ...

Page 926: ... CS Synchronization LAN Synchronization Index Indicates the CS number reference only Default 1 64 Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 19 2 2 PBX Configuration 11 2 2 Maintenance CS Synchronization LAN Synchronization CS Name Indicates the name of the CS reference only Default Not applicable Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 19 2 2 PBX Configuration 11 2 2 Mainten...

Page 927: ...CS Synchronization LAN Synchronization CS Class Specifies the classification of each CS This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS Default Sync Slave Value Range Sync Master CS1 Sync Master CS2 1 Sync Master CS2 2 Sync Slave Maintenance Console Location 19 2 2 PBX Configuration 11 2 2 Maintenance CS Synchronization LAN Synchronization MAC Address Indicates the...

Page 928: ...rrent IP address of the IP CS reference only Default Not applicable Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 19 2 2 PBX Configuration 11 2 2 Maintenance CS Synchronization LAN Synchronization 928 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 19 2 2 PBX Configuration 11 2 2 Maintenance CS Synchronization LAN Synchronization ...

Page 929: ... 19 2 3 PBX Configuration 11 2 3 Maintenance CS Synchronization LAN Sync Group Setting Group Control Setting IP Address for Group Control Specifies the IP address of the group If Broadcast is selected for Group Control Setting Type of Control Packet this setting is grayed out Default 239 0 0 x x is the same as the group number Value Range 239 0 0 1 239 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 19 2...

Page 930: ...Sync Group Setting Synchronization Level Setting Maximum duration of Synchronization holding s Specifies the maximum duration for synchronization holding Default 30 s Value Range 0 256 s Maintenance Console Location 19 2 3 PBX Configuration 11 2 3 Maintenance CS Synchronization LAN Sync Group Setting Synchronization Level Setting Level of Synchronizations Lost and Restart ns Specifies the level at...

Page 931: ...ng timer h Specifies the number of hours between performing in operation monitoring long term Default 24 hours Value Range 2 168 hours Maintenance Console Location 19 2 3 PBX Configuration 11 2 3 Maintenance CS Synchronization LAN Sync Group Setting Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 931 19 2 3 PBX Configuration 11 2 3 Maintenance CS Synchronization LAN Sync Group Setting ...

Page 932: ...ings Shelf Specifies the legacy gateway PBX shelf reference only Default Nos 1 6 2 Nos 7 12 3 Value Range 2 Legacy GW1 3 Legacy GW2 Maintenance Console Location 19 3 PBX Configuration 11 3 Maintenance Power Failure Transfer PC Programming Manual References 9 28 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Legacy GW1 Legacy GW2 PFT Card Position Specifies the position of the card s with power failure t...

Page 933: ... Mailbox Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Mailbox Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 933 ...

Page 934: ... click OK to create the range of mailboxes Editing Mailboxes To edit a specific mailbox select the desired mailbox then click the icon You can also edit specific parameters directly from the Mailbox Settings screen Deleting Mailboxes 1 Select a mailbox 2 Click the icon 3 Click OK 20 1 1 UM Configuration 1 1 Mailbox Settings Quick Setting With Quick Setting you can set the necessary minimum setting...

Page 935: ...han the Message Manager Not stored Message Manager 9 Value Range 2 8 digits Maintenance Console Location 20 1 1 UM Configuration 1 1 Mailbox Settings Quick Setting Feature Manual References 20 1 2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES 20 1 53 Unified Messaging Mailbox PC Programming Manual References 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 9 First Name Specifies the first name of the subscrib...

Page 936: ...tings Quick Setting 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Mailbox Number Specifies the subscriber s mailbox number The maximum number of digits that can be used for mailbox numbers is set in 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Mailbox Mailbox No Max Length 3 8 or when you initialize the system Note The mailbox number can only be set when ad...

Page 937: ...han the Message Manager Not stored Message Manager 0 Value Range 2 8 digits Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES 20 1 53 Unified Messaging Mailbox PC Programming Manual References 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 9 First Name Specifies the first na...

Page 938: ... Setting Mailbox Parameters PC Programming Manual References 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Directory Listing Feature Manual References 20 1 31 Unified Messaging Dialing by Name Mailbox Password Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox If a default password is programmed by an administrator that password will be assigned automatically when creating all mailboxes Administrators...

Page 939: ...Screen click Edit under Mailbox Password Message Client for the mailbox extension to change 2 In the window that appears enter the new password and then enter it again to confirm it 3 Click OK Default Not stored Value Range 4 16 characters A Z a z 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameters PC Programming Manual References 26 1 UM C...

Page 940: ...e Call Handling options that can be enabled or disabled by the subscriber The caller can also be transferred the Covering Extension by pressing 0 while a Personal Greeting is being played or while leaving a message Note Extension Groups or Logical Extensions extensions whose calls are set to always be directed their mailboxes cannot be assigned as covering extensions Default Not stored Value Range...

Page 941: ... is received Default No Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 6 Unified Messaging Automated Attendant AA Call Transfer Sequence Selection Specifies the method for the Call Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox Allows each mailbox to be assigned its own Call Transfer Sequence Person...

Page 942: ...uence Other Specifies the Call Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox Only specified if Call Transfer Sequence Selection is set to Other Default Not stored Value Range Enter a maximum of 16 characters consisting of 0 9 and special codes D Disconnecting F Flash Recall R Ringback Tone Detection T Dial Tone Detection Dial Pause default 1 s Dial Pause default 3 s X Extension Dialing 0 9 Dial Code Maint...

Page 943: ...efault None Value Range None Rings the subscriber s extension Call blocking Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer setting for the subscriber s extension The subscriber s extension will not ring Call screening The caller is prompted to record his or her name The Unified Messaging system then calls the subscriber and plays back the caller name The subscriber can ch...

Page 944: ...ters Feature Manual References 20 1 46 Unified Messaging Incomplete Call Handling Service Incomplete Call Handling for Busy Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when the extension is busy Click Edit for the extension to change program the settings and click OK to finish Note This setting can be changed by subscribers More than one option can be selected Default Leave a Message...

Page 945: ...pre programmed device external telephone etc A maximum of 3 devices Device 1 2 3 can be programmed per mailbox Sending an e mail to a designated address Message Waiting Lamp If set to Enable the Message Waiting Lamp of the subscriber s telephone turns on when a new message is recorded Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Setting...

Page 946: ...nces 20 1 60 Unified Messaging Message Waiting Notification Telephone Device Telephone Device Device No 1 2 3 Only Urgent Messages Specifies if notifications will be sent only for messages designated as urgent Default No Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Notification Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 60 Unified Messagi...

Page 947: ...n Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 60 Unified Messaging Message Waiting Notification Telephone Device Telephone Device Device No 1 2 3 No of Retries Specifies the number of times the Unified Messaging system will try to send notification if the device is busy or if there is no answer Default 0 Value Range 0 9 times Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings ...

Page 948: ...f and how each device is used for message notification The subscriber can also specify the use mode from his or her telephone Schedule If Scheduled is selected here follow the steps below to specify the time frame 1 Select a day from the Day drop down list Sunday Saturday 2 Click Enable Time Frame No 1 or 2 3 Enter the start and end times in the Start At HH MM and End At HH MM fields 4 Repeat step...

Page 949: ...erences 20 1 60 Unified Messaging Message Waiting Notification Telephone Device Telephone Device Device Notification Timer Device Interval Time between Device 1 2 3 and Next Device Specifies how long the PBX waits after sending Message Waiting Notification to Device 1 2 or 3 before sending notification to the next device Default 0 Value Range 0 120 min Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Config...

Page 950: ... any previously input data here Default Not stored Value Range Max 128 characters Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Notification Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 58 Unified Messaging Message Waiting Notification E mail Device E mail Text Message Device Device No 1 2 3 Notification Type Specifies the type of Message Waiting Notification ...

Page 951: ...f the notification Default Title ID Name Value Range Title ID Name Title Name ID ID Title Name Name Title ID ID Name Title Name ID Title Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Notification Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 58 Unified Messaging Message Waiting Notification E mail Device E mail Text Message Device Device No 1 2 3 Title String S...

Page 952: ...n Specifies the delay between the message being left and the sending of the Message Waiting Notification Default 0 Value Range 0 120 min Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Notification Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 58 Unified Messaging Message Waiting Notification E mail Device E mail Text Message Device Device No 1 2 3 Attach Voice F...

Page 953: ...leted from the Unified Message system after they are sent by e mail select Yes for Delete After Send Voice File or Delete After Send Fax File 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each day to be programmed and then click OK Note If voice message or fax image files are set to be deleted after they are sent by e mail be aware that a deleted file cannot be recovered in the event that the e mail is not sent succe...

Page 954: ...will be used If set to Selective the receiver has a choice of prompts See related explanation in 22 1 UM Configuration 3 1 UM Extension Trunk Service Service Group Day Night Lunch and Break Mode Incoming Call Service Prompt Note If set to Selective and the receiver uses a rotary telephone the no entry selection is specified by 22 1 UM Configuration 3 1 UM Extension Trunk Service Service Group Day ...

Page 955: ... Mailbox Number Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be forwarded Note A Mailbox Group number cannot be specified as a destination Default Not stored Value Range 2 the value set in Mailbox No Max Length 3 8 digits Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting External MSG Delivery Auto FWD Personal Custom Serv Feature Manual References 20 1 4 Un...

Page 956: ...essages are forwarded Default All Messages Value Range All Messages Voice Messages Fax Messages Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting External MSG Delivery Auto FWD Personal Custom Serv Feature Manual References 20 1 4 Unified Messaging Auto Forwarding Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent Specifies whether only urgent messages are forwarded Default N...

Page 957: ...rsonal Custom Serv Feature Manual References 20 1 4 Unified Messaging Auto Forwarding Auto Forwarding Mode Message Remains New Specifies if the forwarded messages remain marked as new This setting is available only when Auto Forwarding Mode is set to Copy Default Yes Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting External MSG Delivery Auto...

Page 958: ... mailbox Allow the caller to leave messages in a specified mailbox Transfer to specified extension Transfers the caller to a specified extension Transfer to Voice Mail Service Allows the caller to access Voice Mail Service Transfer to Automated Attendant Service Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant Service Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu Transfers the caller to the Custom Serv...

Page 959: ... 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting External MSG Delivery Auto FWD Personal Custom Serv Feature Manual References 20 1 67 Unified Messaging Personal Custom Service No DTMF Input Operation Specifies the operation taken when no DTMF input a caller does not dial anything is received after the Personal Greeting Default Recording Value Range Recording The caller will be guided to leav...

Page 960: ...are used to send the same messages to several mailboxes in a single operation A maximum of 4 lists can be maintained with each list containing a maximum of 40 mailboxes List 1 Name List 4 Name Specifies a list name Default Not stored Value Range Max 32 characters Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Personal Distribution List Feature Manual Referen...

Page 961: ... tab contains programming items for Remote Call Forwarding Automatic Login and Direct Service settings Remote Call Telephone Number 1 2 Specifies the telephone numbers of destinations to which callers are forwarded when the subscriber sets Remote Call Forwarding 2 telephone numbers can be specified per mailbox Telephone numbers can contain the digits 0 9 and These telephone numbers should begin wi...

Page 962: ...alue Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Remote Call Automatic Login Direct Service Feature Manual References 20 1 8 Unified Messaging Automatic Login Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement Specifies if a password is required for the Automatic Login Extension feature Notice If this is set to No ensure that unauthorize...

Page 963: ...med using the Caller ID of the number set in Auto Login Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ID 2 Default Yes Value Range Yes No Notice If this is set to No ensure that unauthorized third parties are not allowed access to that mailbox using the number assigned to Auto Login Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ID 2 Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Remo...

Page 964: ...anual References 20 1 8 Unified Messaging Automatic Login Auto Login DDI DID TRG No Password Entry Requirement Specifies if a password is required for entry when automatic login is performed using the trunk group number or the DID number Default Yes Value Range Yes No Notice If this is set to No ensure that unauthorized third parties are not allowed access to any extensions using the specified tru...

Page 965: ...xtension Specifies which features can be directly accessed by dialing a Unified Messaging extension number This setting can only be specified for Unified Messaging extension numbers Note Automatic Login must be enabled for extensions to use this feature Default None Value Range Record No Answer Greeting The subscriber can record the greeting played when there is no answer Record Busy Greeting The ...

Page 966: ...2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Fax Options Feature Manual References 20 1 7 Unified Messaging Automatic Fax Delivery Automatic Delivery Status Default Fax Number 0 9 T Specifies the default number for which to send automatically delivered faxes Default Not stored Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and special codes Dial Pause default 1 s Dial Pause default 3 s T Dial...

Page 967: ...h messages will be played either voice messages information about waiting fax messages or all messages Default Yes Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Fax Options Feature Manual References 20 1 7 Unified Messaging Automatic Fax Delivery Fax Number Confirmation Specifies if a dialed fax number must be re entered for confirmation ...

Page 968: ...nces 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Fax Management Cover Page Language Specifies the language used for the set information generated for fax cover pages Default English US Value Range English US English UK French CA French German Swedish Italian Dutch Portuguese Spanish Norwegian Danish Polish Hungarian Czech Russian Greek Ukrainian Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Co...

Page 969: ... the system announces to subscribers the number of only new voice messages in their mailbox when the subscriber logs in Default No Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Announce Number of Messages Subscriber Service New Fax Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new fax messages in their mailb...

Page 970: ...nce Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Announce Number of Messages Receiving Message Service All Messages Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the number of all messages in their mailbox when the subscriber has selected to listen to messages Default Yes Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings F...

Page 971: ...es if the system announces to subscribers the number of only new urgent messages in their mailbox when the subscriber has selected to listen to messages Default No Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Announce Number of Messages Message Client Display Language Specifies the language of information generated by the UM system for t...

Page 972: ...mpany Greeting No 1 can be recorded and changed from the Top Menu This is useful for recording the Emergency Greeting Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Quick Menu and Greeting Recording PC Programming Manual References 23 3 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Feature Manual References 2...

Page 973: ... Range Create mailboxes Re create all mailboxes Maintenance Console Location 20 1 3 UM Configuration 1 3 Mailbox Settings Auto Configuration Installation Manual References 5 12 Automatic Configuration of Mailboxes Feature Manual References 20 1 92 Unified Messaging Mailbox Auto Configuration Select UM group where mailboxes are created Specifies the site where mailboxes are created Default Create m...

Page 974: ... 12 Automatic Configuration of Mailboxes Feature Manual References 20 1 92 Unified Messaging Mailbox Auto Configuration 974 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 20 1 3 UM Configuration 1 3 Mailbox Settings Auto Configuration ...

Page 975: ... Class of Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Class of Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 975 ...

Page 976: ...e Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service General Feature Manual References 20 1 23 Unified Messaging Class of Service COS Prompt Mode Specifies the language used for system prompts played for the subscriber during Subscriber Service If set to Primary the default language which is selected from all installed languages will be used Default Primary Value Range Primary Guidance No 1 8 Maint...

Page 977: ...tutorial subscribers are asked to provide A password The mailbox owner s name Personal Greetings No Answer Greeting Busy Signal Greeting After Hours Greeting Default Normal Value Range Normal A navigation voice menu is given for each step Simplified Only direct prompts are given for making each setting For Personal Greetings only a No Answer Greeting can be set None No tutorial is played and setti...

Page 978: ...cation 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service General Feature Manual References 20 1 2 UNIFIED MESSAGING FEATURES E mail Option Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can receive notifications by e mail when they have a new message waiting Default No Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service General Feature Manual References 20 1 58 Unifie...

Page 979: ... Microsoft Outlook e mail client plug in Default No Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service General Feature Manual References 20 1 61 Unified Messaging Microsoft Outlook Integration System Manager Authority Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service have access to the Unified Messaging system as a System Manager Default No Value Range Yes No M...

Page 980: ...Message Manager and COS 514 System Manager Default 60 s Value Range 1 360 s Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Feature Manual References 20 1 68 Unified Messaging Personal Greetings Message Length Selection Specifies if the length of messages left for subscribers in the Class of Service are unlimited in duration or have a specified time limit If set to Un...

Page 981: ... messages new and saved for mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of Service Default Limited Value Range Unlimited Limited Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Mailbox Capacity Maximum Message Time Limited min Specifies the total number of available minutes for storing messages both new and saved for mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of Service Only spe...

Page 982: ...et to Limited Default 30 days Value Range 1 30 days Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Saved Message Retention Time Selection Specifies if a retention time limit is applied to saved messages in mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of Service If Unlimited is selected saved messages will remain in the mailbox until erased by the subscriber Default Limited ...

Page 983: ...tion Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service can assign telephone numbers for the Personal Caller Name Announcement feature Note This setting is not available for COS 513 Message Manager and COS 514 System Manager Default Other Value Range None Other Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Number of CIDs for Caller Name Announcement Other Specifies th...

Page 984: ...apacity Warning Selection Specifies if the system alerts mailbox subscribers in the Class of Service that the programmed recording time for their mailboxes is reaching its set amount of message storage time If set to None the warning will not be announced Default Other Value Range None Other Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Mailbox Capacity Warning Othe...

Page 985: ...ing If set to Yes the caller s message will be deleted when a subscriber in the Class of Service answers a call via Live Call Screening while the caller is leaving a message Note This setting is not available for COS 514 System Manager Default Yes Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Feature Manual References 20 1 51 Unified Messaging Liv...

Page 986: ...lue Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Feature Manual References 20 1 68 Unified Messaging Personal Greetings Caller ID Callback If set to Yes subscribers in the Class of Service can call the caller back while listening to the caller s message Caller ID Callback Default No Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration ...

Page 987: ...ervice log into their mailboxes Default No Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Play New Messages Sequentially If set to Yes the system plays all new messages for subscribers in the Class of Service sequentially without system prompts The subscriber s Service Top Menu will be heard after all of the messages are played This feature is only...

Page 988: ...n 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Caller ID Number Announcement Specifies whether or not the system announces the Caller ID number when a subscriber in the Class of Service plays a message left by a caller if their name has not been recorded for the Caller Name Announcement feature If the name has been recorded it will be announced regardless of this setting Note If Caller ID Call...

Page 989: ... No Yes Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Password Expiry Period Selection Specifies if the mailbox passwords for subscribers in the Class of Service will expire after a set time Default Disable Value Range Disable Other Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Feature Manual References 20 1 66 Unified Messaging Passw...

Page 990: ...lue Range Save as Old Save as New Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox Feature Manual References 20 1 90 Unified Messaging Two way Record Two way Transfer Call Transfer Intercom Paging Group Specifies the Intercom Paging group number available to subscribers in the Class of Service Note This setting is not available for COS 513 Message Manager Default 1 Val...

Page 991: ...r Caller ID Screen If set to Yes subscribers in the Class of Service can hear the pre recorded names of callers when they receive calls Caller ID Screening Note This setting is not available for COS 513 Message Manager Default Yes Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Call Transfer Feature Manual References 20 1 20 Unified Messaging Caller ID Scre...

Page 992: ... Call Transfer Feature Manual References 20 1 16 Unified Messaging Call Transfer to Outside Hospitality Mode Hospitality Mode Specifies whether subscribers in the Class of Service have the Hospitality Mode enabled For use with extensions for hotel rooms etc This setting must be set to Yes to enable other Hospitality Mode settings When this item is set to Yes only the following options are made ava...

Page 993: ... 1 44 Unified Messaging Hospitality Mode Personal Greeting Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service are given a voice prompt selection to change their Personal Greeting when accessing their mailbox Note For the Personal Greeting of subscribers in a Class of Service with Hospitality mode enabled only No Answer and Busy greetings can be set Default Yes Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console ...

Page 994: ...ubscriber s extension is set to the Check Out status Default Yes Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Hospitality Mode Feature Manual References 9 1 4 HOSPITALITY FEATURES 20 1 44 Unified Messaging Hospitality Mode Erase When Check Out Personal Greeting Specifies if the Personal Greeting of the subscriber in the Class of Service is erased when th...

Page 995: ...of Service is erased when the subscriber s extension is set to the Check Out status Default Yes Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Hospitality Mode Feature Manual References 9 1 4 HOSPITALITY FEATURES 20 1 44 Unified Messaging Hospitality Mode Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 995 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service ...

Page 996: ...996 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service ...

Page 997: ...tension Trunk Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Port Trunk Service menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 997 ...

Page 998: ...g The System Greeting is Good morning Good afternoon Good evening Welcome to the Unified Messaging System Each call service can have its own setting Default Other Value Range None System Other Maintenance Console Location 22 1 UM Configuration 3 1 UM Extension Trunk Service Service Group Feature Manual References 20 1 24 Unified Messaging Company Greeting Day Night Lunch and Break Mode Company Gre...

Page 999: ...h 3 8 Maintenance Console Location 22 1 UM Configuration 3 1 UM Extension Trunk Service Service Group Day Night Lunch and Break Mode Incoming Call Service Prompt Specifies the language of system prompts used by this call service If set to Primary the default language which is selected from all installed languages will be used When set to Selective the caller can select the language of his or her c...

Page 1000: ...uages will be used Default Primary Value Range Primary Guidance No 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 22 1 UM Configuration 3 1 UM Extension Trunk Service Service Group PC Programming Manual References 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Prompt Setting Primary Language Feature Manual References 20 1 82 Unified Messaging System Prompts Day Night Lunch and Break Mode Delayed Answer ...

Page 1001: ... Configuration 3 1 UM Extension Trunk Service Service Group to each UM port 1 For each UM port number select a Service Group number 1 64 from the Service Group drop down list 2 Click OK when finished Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1001 22 2 UM Configuration 3 2 UM Extension Trunk Service Port Assignment ...

Page 1002: ...1002 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 22 2 UM Configuration 3 2 UM Extension Trunk Service Port Assignment ...

Page 1003: ... Service Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Service Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1003 ...

Page 1004: ... or Holiday Service is used these will take priority over Caller ID Call Routing settings Also note that Caller ID Call Routing takes priority over the Trunk Service and Port Service Received Caller ID PIN numbers are searched for in each service setting table in order from the first registered number to last When programming Caller ID PIN routing note the order of registration and remember that w...

Page 1005: ...Call Routing Feature Manual References 20 1 18 Unified Messaging Caller ID Call Routing Call Transfer for Day Night Lunch and Break service Specifies the destination to which the call from an assigned Caller ID number is automatically forwarded A destination can be set for each time mode To disable the setting select None A Mailbox Group number can be entered here instead of a mailbox number Defau...

Page 1006: ...ller ID PIN Call Routing Feature Manual References 20 1 69 Unified Messaging PIN Call Routing Description Specifies a name and or description of the PIN number Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 23 1 UM Configuration 4 1 Service Settings Caller ID PIN Call Routing Feature Manual References 20 1 69 Unified Messaging PIN Call Routing Call Transfer for Day N...

Page 1007: ...lbox Forwards callers to the specified mailbox Fax Service Forwards callers to the fax service Maintenance Console Location 23 1 UM Configuration 4 1 Service Settings Caller ID PIN Call Routing Feature Manual References 20 1 69 Unified Messaging PIN Call Routing Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1007 23 1 UM Configuration 4 1 Service Settings Caller ID PIN Call Routing ...

Page 1008: ...s the system will play the Automated Attendant top menu if the caller does not make a selection Default 3 times Value Range 1 5 times Maintenance Console Location 23 1 UM Configuration 4 1 Service Settings Caller ID PIN Call Routing 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 6 Unified Messaging Automated Attendant AA Play Owner s Name during Transfer Deter...

Page 1009: ...aintenance Console Location 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters PC Programming Manual References 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM PBX Operator Day Lunch Break Night Feature Manual References 20 1 65 Unified Messaging Operator Service Operator Service Operator s Extension Specifies the extension number for Operator 1 2 and 3 for the checked time setting Note The defa...

Page 1010: ... 2 8 digits Maintenance Console Location 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 65 Unified Messaging Operator Service Operator Service Busy Coverage Mode Specifies how to handle calls when the operator is busy Default Hold Value Range Hold Automatically places the caller on hold and the operator is called again No Answer Coverage Offers the option spec...

Page 1011: ...k you for calling Next Operator Transfers the caller to the next operator Maintenance Console Location 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters PC Programming Manual References 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting No DTMF Input Operation Feature Manual References 20 1 65 Unified Messaging Operator Service Operator Service Operator No Answer Time 10 60 s When a cal...

Page 1012: ...ervice Settings Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 6 Unified Messaging Automated Attendant AA Call Hold Mode Call Queuing Announcement Mode If set to Enable callers on hold are informed of their current position in the call hold queue Example One other person is waiting to connect Default Enable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settin...

Page 1013: ...K Editing an Alternate Extension 1 Select the desired alternate extension 2 Click Edit 3 Edit the extension number 4 Click OK Deleting an Alternate Extension 1 Select the desired alternate extension 2 Click Delete 3 Click Yes Changing the order of Alternate Extensions Select an extension and click Move up or Move down to change its order in the list Alternate extensions will be dialed in order fro...

Page 1014: ...Attendant AA Operator Transfer Mode Specifies the timing of the operator transfer Default Transfer immediately Value Range Transfer immediately Do not transfer immediately Maintenance Console Location 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 6 Unified Messaging Automated Attendant AA No DTMF Input Operation No DTMF Input Call Coverage for Day Night Lunch...

Page 1015: ...Night Lunch and Break Selection Default Not stored Value Range 2 8 digits for extensions 2 the value set in Mailbox No Max Length 3 8 digits for mailboxes Maintenance Console Location 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 63 Unified Messaging No DTMF Input Operation Name Entry Number of Digits to Entry Name 3 4 digits Specifies the number of digits le...

Page 1016: ...ed Messaging Dialing by Name Key Mode Specifies the standard used for keypad text entry If set to use the North American Standard press 7 for Q and 9 for Z If set to use the Australasian Standard press 1 for Q and Z Default North American Standard Value Range North American Standard Australasian Standard Maintenance Console Location 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Feature Man...

Page 1017: ...ange 5 60 s Maintenance Console Location 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Delayed Answer Time for No New Message 5 60 s Specifies the time period before the system answers the call when there are no new messages Default 24 s Value Range 5 60 s Maintenance Console Location 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 86 Unified Messaging ...

Page 1018: ... create Custom Services visually Each Custom Service and its functions can be edited arranged using a familiar drag and drop interface The following Custom Service types are available Menu Transfer Date Control Time Control Day Control Password Creating a Custom Service 1 Click the desired Custom Service type under Custom Service Type 2 Click on an area within the workspace to the right of the men...

Page 1019: ...ing Menu Transfer or Password You can also skip this step and go to step 7 5 Select Record from extension or Import from recorded file When Record from extension is selected 1 Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording then click Connect 2 When the specified extension rings go off hook 3 Click Record Play or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension 4 Click D...

Page 1020: ...eferences 20 1 27 Unified Messaging Custom Service Prompt Mode Specifies the language for prompts used by this Custom Service Note This parameter overrides a set Incoming Call Service Prompt If Primary is selected the default language which is selected from all installed languages will be used If None is selected the prompt mode of previous process will be continued or Primary language will be sel...

Page 1021: ...ways waits for the amount determined by the Wait for Second Digit 1 5 s setting before handling the call This will cause a delay between the time the caller dials a single digit Custom Service option number and when the call is actually handled Default Extn Value Range Extn Enables callers to be transferred directly to their intended party by dialing the extension number Mbx Enables callers to lea...

Page 1022: ... be dialed This gives the caller time to continue dialing a mailbox number extension number or PIN If this time expires without a second digit being entered the system assumes the caller has selected a Custom Service menu option and handles the call according to the digit dialed by the caller Default 1 s Value Range 1 5 s Maintenance Console Location 23 3 1 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Cu...

Page 1023: ...destination telephone number Exit Plays the Custom Service exit prompt and disconnects the caller Prev Menu Returns the caller to the previous menu not available if there was no previous menu Cust Serv Transfers the caller to the Custom Service specified here VM Serv Allows the caller to access Voice Mail Service Call Trf Serv Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant Service Subscr Serv All...

Page 1024: ...n Example Canceling the setting for key 1 1 Clear the check box next to key 1 Maintenance Console Location 23 3 1 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Menu Transfer Feature Manual References 20 1 27 Unified Messaging Custom Service 1024 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 23 3 1 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Menu Transfer ...

Page 1025: ...ault Outside None Value Range Period 1 5 Name Max 16 characters From To Select the check box and then click the input field to select a date month and day from the calendar You can specify a beginning date From ending date To or both for each period Assigned Operation Trf to Mbx Trf to Ext Operator Trf to Out Exit Prev Menu Cust Serv VM Serv Call Trf Serv Subscr Serv Dial by Name Repeat Menu Main ...

Page 1026: ...ration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Date Control Feature Manual References 20 1 27 Unified Messaging Custom Service 1026 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 23 3 2 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Date Control ...

Page 1027: ...peration Note When the start time is specified and the end time is None the period will end at 00 00 Outside Allows you to specify an operation that is enabled for all other times not included in the set time periods Default Outside None Value Range Period 1 5 Name Max 16 characters From To Select the check box click the input field and then specify a time hour and minute You can specify a beginni...

Page 1028: ...ne see 23 3 1 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Menu Transfer Key Assigned Operation 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 23 3 3 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Time Control Feature Manual References 20 1 27 Unified Messaging Custom Service 1028 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 23 3 3 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Time Contro...

Page 1029: ...e a In the Holiday Table select Custom Service Menu and specify the number of this Date Control Holiday Custom Service or the number of its higher layered Custom Service see 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table b Assign the desired Date Control Holiday Custom Service or its higher layered Custom Service to the desired Port CO line see 22 1 UM Configuration 3 1 UM Extension Trun...

Page 1030: ...uration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Day Control Feature Manual References 20 1 27 Unified Messaging Custom Service 1030 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 23 3 4 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Day Control ...

Page 1031: ...tion 23 3 5 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Password Feature Manual References 20 1 27 Unified Messaging Custom Service Menu Repeat Cycle 1 3 Specifies the number of times the Custom Service menu message will be repeated to the caller Default 1 Value Range 1 3 times Maintenance Console Location 23 3 5 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Password Feature Manual...

Page 1032: ...stom Service No DTMF Input Operation Determines how calls are handled when callers do not dial any numbers in response to system guidance often because they are rotary telephone users The default setting is Operator which allows the caller to be automatically connected to an operator after the message is played Default Operator Value Range Trf to Mbx Trf to Ext Operator Trf to Out Exit Prev Menu C...

Page 1033: ...rd and an operation for the specified password Cancel Determines the operation that is activated when a caller presses to cancel password entry Default None Value Range Pass1 5 Password Max 12 digits Assigned Operation Trf to Mbx Trf to Ext Operator Trf to Out Exit Prev Menu Cust Serv VM Serv Call Trf Serv Subscr Serv Dial by Name Repeat Menu Main Menu Trf to Fax Extn List All Names Fax Service No...

Page 1034: ...figuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Password Feature Manual References 20 1 27 Unified Messaging Custom Service 1034 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 23 3 5 UM Configuration 4 3 Service Settings Custom Service Password ...

Page 1035: ...e setting of the holiday This setting synchronizes with the PBX s Holiday Table Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table Feature Manual References 20 1 43 Unified Messaging Holiday Service PC Programming Manual References 10 5 PBX Configuration 2 5 System Holiday Table Holiday Table Setting Name of Holiday Spec...

Page 1036: ...tart Time Specifies the time of day on the specified date at which to begin the holiday service Click the cell to display an array of hours and minutes Select an hour of the day and a minute of the hour to set the time Default Not stored Value Range Hour and Minute Maintenance Console Location 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table Feature Manual References 20 1 43 Unified Messag...

Page 1037: ...nute of the hour to set the time Default Not stored Value Range Hour and Minute Maintenance Console Location 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table Feature Manual References 20 1 43 Unified Messaging Holiday Service Retain Holiday If Yes is selected the holiday will not end regardless of the end time setting To end the holiday setting when Yes is selected and the end time has alr...

Page 1038: ...e can be assigned to each holiday After a greeting is played if specified the call will be transferred to the selected service Default Automated Attendant Service Value Range Voice Mail Service The caller is transferred to the Voice Mail Service Automated Attendant Service The caller is transferred to the Automated Attendant Service Interview Mailbox The caller is transferred to an Interview Mailb...

Page 1039: ...t all checked Value Range Trunk No 1 96 All Maintenance Console Location 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table Feature Manual References 20 1 43 Unified Messaging Holiday Service Port Affected Specify which UM ports will be subject to the holiday setting Click Edit and then select the check boxes for the UM ports to be subject to the holiday setting or select the All check box t...

Page 1040: ...Feature Manual References 20 1 43 Unified Messaging Holiday Service 1040 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 23 4 UM Configuration 4 4 Service Settings Holiday Table ...

Page 1041: ...System Parameters This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Parameters menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1041 ...

Page 1042: ...the Edit button of the group to add mailboxes to 2 In the Subscribers To Add column select the check boxes for the mailbox numbers to add to the group 3 Click Add 4 Click OK 5 Click OK Recording a Name for the Group in the Edit Mailbox Group dialog box 1 Select the desired Mailbox Group and click the icon Note Before you can record confirm that there is at least 1 member in the group and that you ...

Page 1043: ...e set in Mailbox No Max Length 3 8 digits Maintenance Console Location 24 1 UM Configuration 5 1 System Parameters Mailbox Group Feature Manual References 20 1 41 Unified Messaging Group Distribution Lists Group Name Specifies the group name Default Not stored Value Range Max 32 characters Maintenance Console Location 24 1 UM Configuration 5 1 System Parameters Mailbox Group Feature Manual Referen...

Page 1044: ...also edit specific parameters directly from the Extension Group list Deleting Extension Groups 1 Select an Extension Group 2 Click the icon 3 Click Yes Editing Extension Group Members 1 In the Extension No column click the Click To Edit button to open the Group Members window 2 Click the icon 3 Enter the extension to add in Extension and click OK 4 Click OK The table on this screen will list any e...

Page 1045: ...t Not stored Value Range Max 32 characters Maintenance Console Location 24 2 UM Configuration 5 2 System Parameters Extension Group Feature Manual References 20 1 34 Unified Messaging Extension Group Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1045 24 2 UM Configuration 5 2 System Parameters Extension Group ...

Page 1046: ...tion 1 Specify the Caller ID No and Description for each entry that will be used 2 Click OK Editing Caller ID Entries To edit an entry select the desired mailbox group then click the icon You can also edit specific parameters directly from the list Deleting Mailboxes 1 Select an entry 2 Click the icon 3 Click Yes Recording a Name for the extension in the Caller Information dialog box 1 Select the ...

Page 1047: ... Announcement Feature Manual References 20 1 21 Unified Messaging Caller Name Announcement Description Enters a name and or description of the Caller ID number Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 24 3 UM Configuration 5 3 System Parameters System Caller Name Announcement Feature Manual References 20 1 21 Unified Messaging Caller Name Announcement Document ...

Page 1048: ...guration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Morning Hours Start Time HH MM Specifies the starting time of the morning greeting Default 3 00 Value Range HH MM HH Hour MM Minute Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 24 Unified Messaging Company Greeting Afternoon Hours Start Time HH MM Specifies the starting time of the after...

Page 1049: ... 24 Unified Messaging Company Greeting Prompt Setting These settings are required when Multilingual Service is enabled Primary Language Specifies the default language to be used when another language is not selected in the Multilingual Selection Menu Default US English Value Range Guidance No 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual Ref...

Page 1050: ...nk Service Service Group Day Night Lunch and Break Mode Prompt for No DTMF Input Callers 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters External Message Delivery Feature Manual References 20 1 62 Unified Messaging Multilingual Service 20 1 82 Unified Messaging System Prompts Language 1 5 Language Specifies the language for the current language selection number Default None Value Range None...

Page 1051: ...eing entered the system uses the Primary Language Default 6 s Value Range 0 20 s Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 82 Unified Messaging System Prompts Selection Menu Repeat Cycle 1 3 times Specifies the number of times the system will play the Multilingual Selection Menu Default 1 time Value Range 1 3 Maintenance Cons...

Page 1052: ...ne is connected for outgoing calls before playing the prompt Default 1 s Value Range 0 10 s Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 82 Unified Messaging System Prompts System Guidance System Guidance Specifies the parameters which vary depending on the language assigned as the System Guidance language For each selection of ...

Page 1053: ...rs Parameters System Guidance Select Language O clock Prompt Specifies when and if O clock is announced Default When at 00 Value Range When at 00 the system announces O clock only on the hour such one o clock Always the system announces O clock always None No announcement Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters System Guidance Select Language Month Day P...

Page 1054: ...sequence for transferring calls to an operator s extension Default FX Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and special codes D Disconnecting F Flash Recall R Ringback Tone Detection T Dial Tone Detection Dial Pause default 1 s Dial Pause default 3 s X Extension Dialing 0 9 Dial Code Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters PBX Environment Extension...

Page 1055: ...ialing 0 9 Dial Code Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 3 Unified Messaging Alternate Extension Group Dialing Parameters MSW Notification Dialing Parameters Call Transfer No Answer Time 10 60 s Specifies the length of time that the system waits before retrieving the transferred call when there is no answer at the desti...

Page 1056: ...s no answer at the outside number called Default 30 s Value Range 10 90 s Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Dialing Parameters Pause Time for 100 9900 ms 100 ms Specifies the pause time for used in call sequences Default 1000 ms Value Range 100 9900 ms in units of 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Param...

Page 1057: ...5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 60 Unified Messaging Message Waiting Notification Telephone Device External Message Delivery Determines how essential External Message Delivery features are carried out Retry Times times Specifies the number of times the system will attempt to deliver an external message when the destination is busy or does not answer Default 3 times ...

Page 1058: ...estination is not answering Default 60 min Value Range 60 120 min Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 35 Unified Messaging External Message Delivery Service Outgoing Call UM Extensions Specifies the Unified Messaging extensions for the External Message Delivery feature If not specifying the Unified Messaging extensions ...

Page 1059: ...pecifies the maximum number of External Delivery Messages that can be stored in one mailbox Default 3 Value Range 1 100 Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 35 Unified Messaging External Message Delivery Service System External Message Delivery Duration Time 1 9 min Specifies the maximum length of External Message Delive...

Page 1060: ...ers Intercom Paging Parameters Unified Messaging Intercom Paging functions in conjunction with the Intercom Paging feature of the PBX It allows the system to page the called party announce the caller s name line number etc while the caller is placed on hold To utilize this feature Intercom Paging must be available for the PBX and the Unified Messaging system must be properly programmed No Answer T...

Page 1061: ... set Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer Incomplete Call Handling for Busy to Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging and the subscriber is busy or if there is no answer Default 2 times Value Range 1 10 times Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters PC Programming Manual References 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Incomplete ...

Page 1062: ...vailable to receive a fax the system will forward the fax call to the alternate fax extension Automatic Transfer of Incoming Fax Call Specifies the detection and destination of incoming fax calls Note The system can detect incoming fax signals during the first 30 seconds after it answers incoming calls Default Disable Value Range Disable Transfer to Fax Extension Receive Fax Maintenance Console Lo...

Page 1063: ...ture Manual References 20 1 38 Unified Messaging Fax Server Alternate Fax Extension No 1 8 digits Specifies the extension number of the alternate fax machine When the main fax extension is busy or does not answer within the time specified under Fax No Answer Time 5 60s the system forwards the fax call to the alternate fax extension Default Not stored Value Range 1 8 digits Maintenance Console Loca...

Page 1064: ...gth 3 8 digits Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 38 Unified Messaging Fax Server Fax No Answer Coverage Mode Determines what action the system takes when an incoming fax call could not be answered by the main or alternate fax extension The system can announce to the Fax Manager the number of unanswered fax calls The n...

Page 1065: ...nager when fax calls are answered Mbx The system will announce the number of successfully received fax calls to the Fax Manager when the Fax Manager logs in to his or her mailbox Ext The system will announce the number of successfully received fax calls to the Fax Manager by calling the Fax Manager s extension Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feat...

Page 1066: ...ies the system fax number for the fax server This number will appear on the cover page of fax messages sent by the fax server Default Not stored Value Range Max 20 digits Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 38 Unified Messaging Fax Server Fax Properties Number of Retries 0 99 Specifies the number of times a fax will be ...

Page 1067: ...e Retransmission Specifies if a document will be re transmitted if for any reason the fax transmission is interrupted Default Enable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 38 Unified Messaging Fax Server Fax Properties Page Retransmission Retransmission Start Page Specifies the starting page of a...

Page 1068: ...M Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 38 Unified Messaging Fax Server Fax Properties Response Wait Interval s Specifies the amount of time the system will wait for an answer when trying to send a fax Default 55 s Value Range 0 90 s Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 38 Unified ...

Page 1069: ...information is positioned inside the print area of the fax document Outside Printed information is positioned outside of the margins of the print area of the fax document Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 38 Unified Messaging Fax Server Fax Properties Cover Page Specifies if sent faxes will have a cover page attached ...

Page 1070: ...ature Manual References 20 1 38 Unified Messaging Fax Server Fax Properties Fax Busy Coverage Mode When the system is busy and cannot receive faxes the system can transfer incoming faxes to a fax extension or not answer the incoming call the extension will be busy Default No Receiving Value Range Transfer to Fax Extension No Receiving Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System P...

Page 1071: ... of time the system waits when a cyclic tone is detected before it disconnects the call Default 6 s Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Maximum Call Duration 0 60 min Specifies the maximum duration of calls If the system detects no DTMF signals for the specified amount of time it terminates the call Calls will not be terminated whi...

Page 1072: ...etection Dial Pause for 1 s default Dial Pause for 3 s default N Telephone Number Dialing 0 9 Dial Code Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 16 Unified Messaging Call Transfer to Outside Outside Transfer Sequence EFA Transfer Sequence Up to 16 digits 0 9 D F R T N A Specifies the sequence the system uses to transfer call...

Page 1073: ...s default N Telephone Number Dialing A Feature Access Code 0 9 Dial Code Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Outside Transfer Sequence EFA Transfer Reconnect Sequence on No Answer Up to 16 digits 0 9 D F R T N A Specifies the sequence the system uses to reconnect the line when the party transferred with EFA External Feature Access does not answer Thi...

Page 1074: ...e Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 16 Unified Messaging Call Transfer to Outside Trunk Group 1 96 Trunk Group No Specifies a trunk group for making settings for EFA Transfer Caller ID Callback and Outside Line Access Sequence for Caller ID Callback Selecting different trunk groups from this drop down list allows sett...

Page 1075: ...ion 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Trunk Group 1 96 Outside Line Access Sequence for Caller ID Callback Up to 16 digits 0 9 D F R T Specifies the sequence of CO line access numbers for Caller ID Callback This parameter is available when the system executes Caller ID Callback without using EFA Default 9T Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and special codes D Disconn...

Page 1076: ...e made in order for the system to use E mail Integration features Mail Address Up to 128 ASCII characters Specifies the mail address of the Unified Messaging system Default Not stored Value Range Max 128 characters Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 58 Unified Messaging Message Waiting Notification E mail Device Full N...

Page 1077: ... maximum length of voice messages sent as e mail attachments Note If you attach a voice message that is longer than this setting surplus parts of the message may be discarded when sending the e mail Default 5 min Value Range 1 30 min Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Feature Manual References 20 1 58 Unified Messaging Message Waiting Notification E...

Page 1078: ...e changed to a smaller value if mailboxes exist with a number of digits greater than that smaller value Those mailboxes must be re numbered or deleted before this setting can be changed to a smaller value Default 3 digits Value Range 3 8 digits Maintenance Console Location 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters 1078 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 24 4 UM Configurati...

Page 1079: ...on 6 H W Settings This section serves as reference operating instructions for the H W Settings menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1079 ...

Page 1080: ...g Before Onhook 0 250 s Specifies the length of time that the system waits for an answer when making an outside call If no answer is detected the system disconnects the call Default 60 s Value Range 0 250 s Maintenance Console Location 25 1 UM Configuration 6 H W Settings Global Parameters DTMF Cut Length 0 500 ms Specifies the length of time for DTMF to be deleted when it is detected while record...

Page 1081: ... shorter than the specified minimum recording length are discarded from the mailbox Default 2 s Value Range 0 9 s Maintenance Console Location 25 1 UM Configuration 6 H W Settings Global Parameters Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1081 25 1 UM Configuration 6 H W Settings ...

Page 1082: ...1082 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 25 1 UM Configuration 6 H W Settings ...

Page 1083: ...7 System Security This section serves as reference operating instructions for the System Security menu of the UM Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1083 ...

Page 1084: ... to the Unified Messaging system from the System Manager s telephone Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 26 1 UM Configuration 7 System Security Manager Password for System Manager Up to 16 numeric digits If Enable is selected in System Manager Access from Telephone assign a numerical password here for the System Manager to login to the system Default Not stored...

Page 1085: ...tem from the Message Manager s telephone Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 26 1 UM Configuration 7 System Security Manager Feature Manual References 20 1 84 Unified Messaging System Security Password for Message Manager Up to 16 numeric digits If Enable is selected in Message Manager Access from Telephone assign a numerical password here for the Message Manage...

Page 1086: ...ber Minimum Password Length 0 16 digits Specifies the minimum length number of digits of mailbox passwords Default 4 Value Range 0 16 Maintenance Console Location 26 1 UM Configuration 7 System Security Subscriber Enable Login Failure Disconnection Specifies whether the system disconnects a call when the subscriber enters an invalid password n times n the value specified under Login Failures befor...

Page 1087: ...saging System Security Default Password Fix digit which length is minimum password length Select this option to specify a fixed password for all new mailboxes The number of digits in the password must be equal or greater than the value specified in Minimum Password Length 0 16 digits Default 1111 Value Range Max 16 digits Maintenance Console Location 26 1 UM Configuration 7 System Security Subscri...

Page 1088: ...ored Value Range 1 digit 0 9 2 digits 00 99 Maintenance Console Location 26 1 UM Configuration 7 System Security Subscriber 1088 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 26 1 UM Configuration 7 System Security ...

Page 1089: ...7 Router Configuration This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Router Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1089 ...

Page 1090: ...Router Configuration Setup 1 1 1 Router Information Connection Status Router Status Indicates the operation status of the router function reference only If Disable is selected for Connection Mode Out of Service is displayed Default Out of Service Value Range In Service Out of Service Fault Maintenance Console Location 27 1 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 1 1 Router Information Connection Status WAN...

Page 1091: ...y on the LAN reference only If Disable is selected for Connection Mode information will not be displayed on this screen Default Blank Value Range Blank 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 1 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 1 1 Router Information Connection Status Preferred DNS IP Address Indicates the IP address of the primary DNS reference only If Disable is selected for Connect...

Page 1092: ...ormation will not be displayed on this screen Default Blank Value Range Blank 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 1 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 1 1 Router Information Connection Status 1092 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 27 1 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 1 1 Router Information Connection Status ...

Page 1093: ...sion Enabled refer to 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings PPPoE Session Enabled is set to Disable the button will be grayed out The button is available only for Installer level and User Administrator level accounts Default No Connect Value Range No Connect The session is not connected Connecting The session is in the process of being connected not yet connected with the...

Page 1094: ...ion Setup 1 1 2 Router Information PPPoE Status Elapsed Time Indicates the time elapsed since this port acquired the link reference only Default 00 00 00 Value Range 00 00 00 99 59 59 Maintenance Console Location 27 1 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 1 2 Router Information PPPoE Status Detail Information Sent Packets Indicates the number of packets sent from this port since the last reset or manual ...

Page 1095: ...U Indicates the largest packet size permitted for network transmission reference only If the MTU value range for PPPoE is outside of 256 1492 is displayed If the MTU value range for PPP Ethernet is outside of 256 1500 is displayed Default hyphen Value Range 256 1500 hyphen Maintenance Console Location 27 1 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 1 2 Router Information PPPoE Status Document Version 2016 03 ...

Page 1096: ...tion If SA is not registered when the Remote IP Address of ISAKMP is static the SA name is not displayed Default Not stored Value Range ASCII characters Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 1 3 Router Configuration Setup 1 1 3 Router Information VPN Status Type Indicates the configured VPN protocol mode reference only Default Tunnel Value Range Tunnel Transport Maintenance Console Loc...

Page 1097: ... IP Address Type in 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec SA ISAKMP Disconnect is always displayed This setting is available for the Installer level account and User Administrator level account Default Disconnect Value Range Disconnect Connect Maintenance Console Location 27 1 3 Router Configuration Setup 1 1 3 Router Information VPN Status RCV Indicates the number of packets received at this p...

Page 1098: ...etup 1 1 3 Router Information VPN Status Elapsed Time Indicates the time elapsed since the last reset reference only This value will reset to zero after the maximum value is reached Default 00 00 00 Value Range 00 00 00 99 59 59 Maintenance Console Location 27 1 3 Router Configuration Setup 1 1 3 Router Information VPN Status 1098 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 27 1 3 Router Config...

Page 1099: ...r Connection Mode this screen is displayed WAN IP Address Specifies the IP address of the WAN Default Blank Value Range Blank 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask of the WAN Default Blank Value Range Blank 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Maintenance Conso...

Page 1100: ... Basic Settings DNS Setting Preferred DNS IP Address Default Blank Value Range Blank 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings PC Programming Manual References 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Basic Settings Installation Manual References 8 6 5 DNS Client Alternative DNS IP Address Specifies the IP address of the sec...

Page 1101: ... an IP address automatically from a DHCP server If DHCP is selected for Connection Mode this screen is displayed Host Name Specifies the host name if a host name is assigned by the ISP Default Not stored Value Range 1 63 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings Obtain Gateway address automatically Selects whether to obtain the IP addre...

Page 1102: ... WAN Connection Settings Preferred DNS IP Address Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server If the DNS server address is set manually that value takes priority over the value set by DHCP Note Since communication over a VPN will not be possible do not set a destination IP address in the VPN for this setting If this setting is configured at the same time as the following setting the followi...

Page 1103: ... time as the following setting the following setting takes precedence 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Basic Settings DNS Setting Alternative DNS IP Address Default Blank Value Range Blank 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings PC Programming Manual References 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Basic Settings...

Page 1104: ...Connection Settings User name Specifies the user name provided by the ISP Default Not stored Value Range 0 64 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings Password Specifies the password provided by the ISP Default Not stored Value Range 0 64 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Set...

Page 1105: ...ssigned by the ISP Static IP Select this if the ISP requires you to use a single global IP address Unnumbered Select this if the ISP requires you to use the multiple global IP addresses Default Dynamic IP Value Range Dynamic IP Static IP Unnumbered Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings IP Address Specifies the IP address when IP Address Config...

Page 1106: ...5 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings DNS Setting Selects the method of setting the DNS address Auto Select this if the DNS IP address is assigned by the ISP Static Select this to enter the DNS IP address manually Default Auto Value Range Auto Static Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connect...

Page 1107: ...S when DNS Setting is set to Static Note Since communication over a VPN will not be possible do not set a destination IP address in the VPN for this setting If this setting is configured at the same time as the following setting the following setting takes precedence 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Basic Settings DNS Setting Alternative DNS IP Address Default Blank Value Range Blank 1 0 0 ...

Page 1108: ...g menu for PPPoE Advanced Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings PPPoE Advanced MTU If the MTU value is assigned by the ISP set it here 1280 1492 If the MTU value is outside of the value range below 1280 or 1492 is displayed Default 1452 Value Range 1280 1492 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Se...

Page 1109: ...n Demand or Disconnect when Idle timeout this setting is grayed out Default 5 Value Range 1 1440 min Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings LCP ECHO If LCP ECHO is selected for PPP Keep Alive configure the parameters below Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings LCP ECHO LCP Echo Interval s S...

Page 1110: ...at the PBX is judged to be recovered after the PPPoE connection has been re established If LCP ECHO is not selected for 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings PPPoE PPP Keep Alive this item is grayed out Default 8 Value Range 1 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings TCP MSS Selects the setting method of the TCP MSS ...

Page 1111: ...MSS Value If the TCP MSS value is outside of the value range below 536 or 1452 is displayed If Fixed is not selected for TCP MSS this item is grayed out Default 1452 Value Range 536 1452 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1111 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings ...

Page 1112: ...uests If Disable is selected for ICMP Keep Alive Enabled this setting cannot be specified Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 2 WAN Network Monitor Advanced Setting Click here to open the advanced setting menu for Network Monitor Advanced Maintenance Console Location 27 2 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 2 WAN Ne...

Page 1113: ...2 WAN Network Monitor Interval s Specifies the interval of the polling timer used for sending ICMP echo requests Default 30 Value Range 1 3600 s Maintenance Console Location 27 2 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 2 WAN Network Monitor Fail Count Specifies the maximum count of ICMP echo failures If Disable is selected for ICMP Keep Alive Enabled this setting cannot be specified Default 2 Value Range...

Page 1114: ...tate If Disable is selected for ICMP Keep Alive Enabled this setting cannot be specified Default 3 Value Range 1 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 2 WAN Network Monitor 1114 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 27 2 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 2 WAN Network Monitor ...

Page 1115: ...e Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 27 2 3 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 3 WAN Protocol Bridge PPPoE Bridge Select whether or not to enable PPPoE Bridge Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 27 2 3 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 3 WAN Protocol Bridge Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1115 27 2 3 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 3 WAN Protocol...

Page 1116: ...intenance Console Location 27 2 4 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 4 WAN Dynamic DNS IP Address Specifies the DDNS Server IP Address If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS or URL as DDNS Server the settings on this screen cannot be configured Default Blank Value Range Blank 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 2 4 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 4 WAN Dynamic DNS URL Specif...

Page 1117: ... 4 WAN Dynamic DNS Password Specifies the password for DDNS service If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS the settings on this screen cannot be configured Default Not stored Value Range Maximum 64 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 2 4 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 4 WAN Dynamic DNS Domain Name Specifies the domain name for DDNS service If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS the settings...

Page 1118: ... is selected for Dynamic DNS the settings on this screen cannot be configured Setting 0 specifies an unlimited update time Default 0 Value Range 0 10 1440 min Maintenance Console Location 27 2 4 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 4 WAN Dynamic DNS 1118 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 27 2 4 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 4 WAN Dynamic DNS ...

Page 1119: ...ot stored Value Range 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 3 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 1 LAN IPv4 LAN Setting Subnet Mask Indicates the subnet mask reference only Default Not stored Value Range 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 3 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 1 LAN IPv4 LAN Setting Default Gateway Indicates the I...

Page 1120: ... the Network Service LAN Setting link to open the system network service settings screen for LAN Maintenance Console Location 27 3 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 1 LAN IPv4 PC Programming Manual References 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Basic Settings LAN Setting Dynamic NAPT Dynamic NAPT Enabled Selects whether to utilize a dynamic NAPT Network Address Port Translation Default Enable V...

Page 1121: ... 1 3 1 LAN IPv4 Protocol Advanced Setting Click here to open the advanced setting menu for protocol Maintenance Console Location 27 3 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 1 LAN IPv4 Port Forward Setting Port Forward Specifies whether to set port forwarding for each entry Up to 64 entries Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 27 3 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 1 LAN...

Page 1122: ...ration Setup 1 3 1 LAN IPv4 WAN Port End Specifies the end port for the WAN port range If this setting is blank only the port set for WAN Port Start is available for port forwarding If ICMP is selected for Protocol this item is grayed out Note If neither the start port nor the end port is set any port can be used The user cannot reserve system ports for the WAN side If a range is set ensure that t...

Page 1123: ...ault Blank Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 27 3 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 1 LAN IPv4 LAN Port End Specifies the end port for the LAN port range If this setting is blank only the port set for LAN Port Start is available for port forwarding If ICMP is selected for Protocol this item is grayed out Note If neither the start port nor the end port is set any port can be used The ...

Page 1124: ...ce Console Location 27 3 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 1 LAN IPv4 ICMP WAN LAN Allow ICMP Redirect Selects whether to enter a new IP address in the routing table in accordance with ICMP redirect message Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 27 3 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 1 LAN IPv4 1124 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 27 3 1 Router Configu...

Page 1125: ...Setup 1 3 2 LAN DNS Server DNS Cache Timeout s Specifies the DNS cache timeout which is the time to live TTL value If Disable is selected for DNS Server Enabled this item is grayed out Default 86400 Value Range 0 86400 s Maintenance Console Location 27 3 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 2 LAN DNS Server DNS Server Advanced Setting Click here to open the advanced setting menu for DNS Server Mainten...

Page 1126: ...aintenance Console Location 27 3 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 2 LAN DNS Server IP Address Specifies the IPv4 IP address for the DNS host name Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 3 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 2 LAN DNS Server DNS Server Advanced PTR A Record Enabled Selects whether to specify the PTR A record Default Disable 1126 PC Progra...

Page 1127: ...me Specifies the DNS host name for the DNS Server Default Not stored Value Range 1 254 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 3 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 2 LAN DNS Server DNS Server Advanced CNAME Record Enabled Selects whether to specify the CNAME record Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 27 3 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 2 LAN DNS Server Docume...

Page 1128: ... 3 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 2 LAN DNS Server Host Name Specifies the DNS host name Default Not stored Value Range 1 254 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 3 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 2 LAN DNS Server 1128 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 27 3 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 3 2 LAN DNS Server ...

Page 1129: ...lue Range Blank 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 4 Router Configuration Setup 1 4 Routing Netmask Specifies the netmask for the Destination IP Address Default Blank Value Range Blank 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 Maintenance Console Location 27 4 Router Configuration Setup 1 4 Routing Interface or Gateway Selects the method of specifying the Destination IP Address D...

Page 1130: ...pecifies the IP address of the gateway If Interface or Gateway is set to PPPoE this item is grayed out Default Blank Value Range Blank 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 4 Router Configuration Setup 1 4 Routing 1130 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 27 4 Router Configuration Setup 1 4 Routing ...

Page 1131: ...Address Only Local Host available Specifies the DMZ host IP address connected to the same segment as the LAN port Except IP address of the LAN port If Disable is selected for DMZ this item is grayed out Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 5 Router Configuration Setup 1 5 DMZ Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1131 27 5 Router Configura...

Page 1132: ...ss of your PC s network adaptor After specifying the MAC address you must restart the PBX It is recommended to use the System Reset command of the PBX If Disable is selected for MAC Address Clone this item is grayed out Default Not stored Value Range 00 00 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF Maintenance Console Location 27 6 Router Configuration Setup 1 6 MAC Address PC Programming Manual References 5 4...

Page 1133: ... 2 1 One Touch Security SPI Log Output Selects whether to output logs Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 27 7 Router Configuration Firewall 2 1 One Touch Security DoS Protection WAN Port Selects whether to enable DoS Denial of Service protection If Enable is selected harmful data from the WAN side is detected and the packet is intercepted A detection record is n...

Page 1134: ...LAN Port Specifies whether to deny access to private IP addresses If Enable is selected the following types of packets can be intercepted when the source IP address from LAN to WAN is a private address when the destination IP address from WAN to LAN is a private address A detection record is noted in the log If the IP address on the WAN side is private this setting cannot be configured Default Ena...

Page 1135: ... 1 One Touch Security ICMP Echo Reply Log Output Selects whether to output the logs Default Disable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 27 7 Router Configuration Firewall 2 1 One Touch Security NET BIOS Packet Filtering LAN Port WAN Port Selects whether to enable NET BIOS packet filtering If Enable is selected the following types of services and port numbers can be intercepted ...

Page 1136: ...ty NET BIOS Packet Filtering Log Output Selects whether to output the logs Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 27 7 Router Configuration Firewall 2 1 One Touch Security 1136 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 27 7 Router Configuration Firewall 2 1 One Touch Security ...

Page 1137: ...nce Console Location 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering WAN LAN Basic Policy Indicates whether to accept or discard packets as the basic policy from WAN to LAN reference only If Discard is displayed all packets from WAN to LAN are intercepted Default Discard Value Range Accept Discard Maintenance Console Location 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering Filter I...

Page 1138: ...ecified at 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering Packet Filtering Advanced Maintenance Console Location 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering Source Port Indicates the port name or the port number reference only Default ANY Value Range ANY Port Name Port Number Maintenance Console Location 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering Destination IP Ad...

Page 1139: ... 2 Packet Filtering ICMP Type Indicates the ICMP type reference only Default ANY Value Range ANY Echo Reply Destination Unreachable Source Quench Redirect Echo Request Router Advertisement Router Solicitation Time Exceeded Parameter Problem Timestamp Timestamp Reply Information Request Information Reply Address Mask Request Address Mask Reply Maintenance Console Location 27 8 Router Configuration ...

Page 1140: ... Disable Maintenance Console Location 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering Packet Filtering Advanced Setting Click here to open the advanced setting menu for Packet Filtering Advanced Maintenance Console Location 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering Packet Filtering Advanced LAN WAN Basic Policy Selects whether to accept or discard packets as the basic policy ...

Page 1141: ...cket filter number Once the Entry No is selected all following items on this screen can be programmed for that packet filter Default 1 Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering Filter Filter Selects whether to specify the packet filtering function Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 27 8 Router Configur...

Page 1142: ...et Filtering Filter Protocol Number Other 0 255 Specifies the protocol number If Other 0 255 is not selected for Protocol Number this item is grayed out Default Blank Value Range Blank 0 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering Filter TCP UDP Source Port Selects the method of specifying the TCP UDP Source Port If ICMP is selected for Protocol Number ...

Page 1143: ... the following protocol types can be selected DNS 53 DHCP 67 68 TFTP 69 SNMP 161 162 If TCP UDP is selected for Protocol Number Protocol Name the following protocol types can be selected FTP 20 21 SSH 22 Telnet 23 HTTP 80 HTTPS 443 POP3 110 POS3S 995 IMAP 143 SMTP 25 DNS 53 DHCP 67 68 TFTP 69 SNMP 161 162 Maintenance Console Location 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering Filter T...

Page 1144: ...995 IMAP 143 SMTP 25 If UDP is selected for Protocol Number Protocol Name the following protocol types can be selected DNS 53 DHCP 67 68 TFTP 69 SNMP 161 162 If TCP UDP is selected for Protocol Number Protocol Name the following protocol types can be selected FTP 20 21 SSH 22 Telnet 23 HTTP 80 HTTPS 443 POP3 110 POS3S 995 IMAP 143 SMTP 25 DNS 53 DHCP 67 68 TFTP 69 SNMP 161 162 Maintenance Console ...

Page 1145: ...enance Console Location 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering Filter Source Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask If Subnet is not selected for Source this item is grayed out Default Blank Value Range Blank 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering Filter Destination Selects the method of specifying the destinatio...

Page 1146: ...ange Blank 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering Filter ICMP Type Selects the ICMP type Default ANY Value Range ANY Echo Reply Destination Unreachable Source Quench Redirect Echo Request Router Advertisement Router Solicitation Time Exceeded Parameter Problem Timestamp Timestamp Reply Information Request Information Reply Addre...

Page 1147: ...alue Range Accept Discard Maintenance Console Location 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering Filter Logging Specifies whether to enable the packet filtering log Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Packet Filtering Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1147 27 8 Router Configuration Firewall 2 2 Pa...

Page 1148: ...ting from a Slave unit connected to a Master unit this setting becomes reference only This setting must be made from a Slave unit including a Backup master that is not connected to a Master unit Default Blank Value Range Blank 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 9 Router Configuration VPN 3 1 VPSS Slave Site Site No Selects the site number If Disable is selected for VPSS this s...

Page 1149: ...onsole Location 27 9 Router Configuration VPN 3 1 VPSS VPSS Advanced Additional LAN on VPN Tunnel sharing MAX 4 Entries Local Network Address Specifies the local IP address at an adjacent segment or satellite office for use in VPN tunnel sharing Up to 4 addresses can be specified 1 4 Default Blank Value Range Blank 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 9 Router Configuration VPN ...

Page 1150: ...Timer Settings Creating Site Response Wait Timer s Specifies the maximum waiting time to respond to the request for creating a VPN site If the value set is outside of the value range below 1 or 86400 is displayed Default 10 Value Range 1 86400 s Maintenance Console Location 27 9 Router Configuration VPN 3 1 VPSS Timer Settings Tunnel Established Timer s Specifies the maximum time to establish a VP...

Page 1151: ...Range 1 86400 s Maintenance Console Location 27 9 Router Configuration VPN 3 1 VPSS Timer Settings Deleting Site Completion Wait Timer s Specifies the maximum waiting time to finish deleting a VPN site If the value set is outside of the value range below 1 or 86400 is displayed Default 60 Value Range 1 86400 s Maintenance Console Location 27 9 Router Configuration VPN 3 1 VPSS Timer Settings Chang...

Page 1152: ...Configure the maximum time to monitor the VPSS Information Path If the value set is outside of the value range below 1 or 86400 is displayed Default 5 Value Range 1 86400 s Maintenance Console Location 27 9 Router Configuration VPN 3 1 VPSS 1152 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 27 9 Router Configuration VPN 3 1 VPSS ...

Page 1153: ...ettings Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec IKE Settings IKE Settings Version Indicates the version of IKE Internet Key Exchange reference only Default v1 Value Range v1 Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec IKE Settings Retry Count Specifies the retry count number for the IKE Keep Alive Default 5 Value Range 1 50 Document Version 2...

Page 1154: ... Specifies the IKE SA Security Association lifetime Default 30 Value Range 1 86400 s Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec IKE Settings Phase2 Timeout s Specifies the IPsec SA lifetime Default 30 Value Range 1 86400 s Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec IKE Settings Transmit Count Specifies the number of packet to send Default 1 115...

Page 1155: ...button on this screen to perform checks such as network address duplication on SPD Security Policy Database entries and display the results Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec SP Name Specifies the SP Security Policy name Default Not stored Value Range 1 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Setting Specifies whether t...

Page 1156: ... VPN 3 2 IPSec Source Type Selects the source type of the SA Default Any Value Range Any IP Address Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Source IP Address Specify the source IP Address of the SA This setting is available only if IP Address is selected for Source Type This setting can be set to blank only if Any is selected for Source Type Default 192 168 0 0 Value ...

Page 1157: ...sole Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Destination IP Address Specifies the destination IP Address of the SA This setting is available only if IP Address is selected for Destination Type This setting can be set to blank only if Any is selected for Destination Type Default 192 168 1 0 Value Range Blank 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration V...

Page 1158: ... on this screen to perform checks such as network address duplication on SPD Security Policy Database entries and display the results Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec SP Name Specifies the SP Security Policy name Default Not stored Value Range 1 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Setting Selects whether to enable...

Page 1159: ...Default Any Value Range Any TCP_UDP TCP_UDP_ICMP_IGMP Fixed Protocol No Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Fixed Protocol Number 0 255 Specifies the fixed protocol number to be controlled by IPSec This setting is available only if Fixed Protocol No is selected for Protocol Default 0 Value Range 0 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2...

Page 1160: ...n 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask for the source IP Address of the SA This setting can be set to blank only if Any is selected for Source Type Default 255 255 255 0 Value Range Blank 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Source Port Type Selects the method of specifying the source port number Def...

Page 1161: ...P Address of the SA This setting is available only if IP Address is selected for Destination Type This setting can be set to blank only if Any is selected for Destination Type Default 192 168 1 0 Value Range Blank 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask for destination IP Address of the SA This setting can ...

Page 1162: ...uter Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Destination Port Number Specifies the destination port number Default 1 Value Range 1 65535 Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec TCP MSS Selects the method of specifying the TCP MSS Maximum Segment Size Default Auto Value Range Auto Fixed Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec 1162 PC Programming Manua...

Page 1163: ... Association name Default Not stored Value Range 1 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Exchange Mode Selects the IKE exchange mode Default Main Value Range Main Aggressive Both Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Remote Type Selects the remote type for SA Default Terminal Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manua...

Page 1164: ...ress Specifies the remote IP address If Dynamic is selected for Remote IP Address Type this item is grayed out Default Blank Value Range Blank 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Remote Port Number Type Selects the method of specifying the port number type Default Any Value Range Any Fixed Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configura...

Page 1165: ...nsole Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec My Identifier Specifies My Identifier when FQDN or User FQDN is selected for My Identifier Type If WAN IP Address is selected for My Identifier Type this setting is grayed out Default Not stored Value Range 1 255 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Peer Identifier Type Selects the method of specify...

Page 1166: ... 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Nonce byte Specifies the Nonce Number used ONCE Default 16 Value Range 8 256 Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Phase2 Proposal Check Selects the type of proposal check Default strict Value Range obey strict claim Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec In...

Page 1167: ...sole Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec XAuth Mode Selects whether to enable XAuth Mode Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec IPComp Mode Selects whether to deflate when using IPComp IP Payload Compression Protocol Default deflate Value Range none deflate Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1167 27...

Page 1168: ...is item is grayed out Default Alarm Value Range Alarm Alarm SA Delete Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec DPD Interval s Specifies the DPD interval in seconds If ICMP Echo is selected for Mode this item is grayed out Default 10 Value Range 1 3600 s Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec DPD Retry Interval s Specifies the DPD retry in...

Page 1169: ...on 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec DPD Recovery Time s Specifies the recovery time for DPD in seconds If ICMP Echo is selected for Mode this item is grayed out Default 60 Value Range 1 3600 s Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec IKE Proposal SA Name Specifies the SA Session Announcement name Default Not stored Value Range 1 16 characters Document Version 2...

Page 1170: ...re displayed as black circles Default Not stored Value Range 8 63 characters Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Encryption Algorithm Selects the encryption algorithm Default 3DES CBC Value Range AES CBC 128 AES CBC 192 AES CBC 256 DES CBC 3DES CBC Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Hash Algorithm Selects the hash algorithm Defau...

Page 1171: ...lects the SA life time Default 28800 Value Range 300 691200 s Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Perfect Forward Secrecy Specifies whether to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy PFS in phase 2 When Off is selected the secret shared key created in phase 1 is used in phase 2 Security is increased when PFS is enabled Default Off Value Range On Off Maintenance Console Loc...

Page 1172: ...r IPSec Default ESP Value Range AH ESP Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Lifetime s Specifies the SA life time Default 3600 Value Range 300 691200 s Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Capsulation Selects the IPSec mode Default Tunnel Value Range Transport Tunnel 1172 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 27 10 Router C...

Page 1173: ...ash algorithm Default HMAC SHA1 Value Range HMAC MD5 HMAC SHA1 Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Diffie Hellman Group Selects the Diffie Hellman Group Default Group2 modp1024 Value Range None Group1 modp768 Group2 modp1024 Group5 modp1536 Group14 modp2048 Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec XAuth ID User Name 32 characters Speci...

Page 1174: ...ion 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec Password 32 characters Specifies the password Default Not stored Value Range Maximum 32 characters a z A Z 0 9 hyphen underscore Maintenance Console Location 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec 1174 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec ...

Page 1175: ... grayed out Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 11 Router Configuration VPN 3 3 Pass Through PPTP Pass Through Selects whether to enable PPTP Pass Through Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 27 11 Router Configuration VPN 3 3 Pass Through PPTP Pass Through IP Address Specifies the IP address assigned from the PP...

Page 1176: ... Location 27 11 Router Configuration VPN 3 3 Pass Through L2TP Pass Through IP Address Specifies the IP address assigned from the L2TP server when connected If Disable is selected for L2TP Pass Through this item is grayed out Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 27 11 Router Configuration VPN 3 3 Pass Through 1176 PC Programming Manual Document Versio...

Page 1177: ...uter Configuration QoS Settings 4 QoS Service Auto QoS VoIP Priority Queue TOS DSCP Selects the method of specifying the automatic QoS setting If ON is not checked for Auto QoS VoIP Enable this item is grayed out Default Priority Queue Value Range Priority Queue TOS DSCP Maintenance Console Location 27 12 Router Configuration QoS Settings 4 QoS Service Auto QoS VoIP Mode Selects the kind of VoIP p...

Page 1178: ...h Size Kbps 64 100000 Maintenance Console Location 27 12 Router Configuration QoS Settings 4 QoS Service Advanced Setting Click here to open the advanced setting menu for QoS Settings Advanced Maintenance Console Location 27 12 Router Configuration QoS Settings 4 QoS Service QoS Settings Advanced WAN QoS QoS Mode Indicates the QoS mode Reference Only Maintenance Console Location 27 12 Router Confi...

Page 1179: ...tem is grayed out Default 0 Value Range 0 3 Maintenance Console Location 27 12 Router Configuration QoS Settings 4 QoS Service WAN QoS Protocol No Selects the method of specifying protocols for which QoS is applied If ANY is selected for Protocol No QoS is available for all protocols If Select Protocol is selected for Protocol No specify the protocol type for Select Protocol below If Other 0 255 i...

Page 1180: ...lable only if Other 0 255 is selected for WAN QoS Protocol No Default Blank Value Range Blank 0 255 Maintenance Console Location 27 12 Router Configuration QoS Settings 4 QoS Service WAN QoS Source Selects the method of specifying a source If ANY is selected for Source QoS is available for all IP addresses If Address is selected for Source enter the IP address for IP Address below If Subnet is sel...

Page 1181: ...ttings 4 QoS Service WAN QoS Destination Selects the method of specifying a destination IP address If ANY is selected for Destination QoS is available for all IP addresses If Address is selected for Destination enter the IP address for IP Address below If Subnet is selected for Destination enter the subnet mask for Subnet Mask below Default ANY Value Range ANY Address Subnet Maintenance Console Lo...

Page 1182: ...Location 27 12 Router Configuration QoS Settings 4 QoS Service WAN QoS TOS DSCP Enable Specifies whether to enable QoS by using the DSCP value Default OFF Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 27 12 Router Configuration QoS Settings 4 QoS Service WAN QoS TOS DSCP Selects the method of specifying DSCP value Default ANY Value Range ANY TOS DSCP Value 0 63 Maintenance Console Location 27 12...

Page 1183: ...Configuration QoS Settings 4 QoS Service WAN QoS TOS Mapping TOS DSCP Value 0 63 Specifies the TOS DSCP value If above Enable is not checked this item is grayed out Default 0 Value Range 0 63 Maintenance Console Location 27 12 Router Configuration QoS Settings 4 QoS Service Bandwidth Control Enable Selects whether to enable bandwidth control If Enable is not selected Priority Queue 0 kbps Priority...

Page 1184: ...pecifies the maximum bandwidth for this queue If you did not check Enable as Bandwidth Control this item is grayed out Default Blank Value Range Blank 64 100000 Kbps Maintenance Console Location 27 12 Router Configuration QoS Settings 4 QoS Service Bandwidth Control Upstream Priority Queue 2 kbps Specifies the maximum bandwidth for this queue If you did not check Enable as Bandwidth Control this i...

Page 1185: ...u did not check Enable as Bandwidth Control this item is grayed out Default Blank Value Range Blank 64 100000 Kbps Maintenance Console Location 27 12 Router Configuration QoS Settings 4 QoS Service Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1185 27 12 Router Configuration QoS Settings 4 QoS Service ...

Page 1186: ...1186 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 27 12 Router Configuration QoS Settings 4 QoS Service ...

Page 1187: ...ion 28 Network Service This section serves as reference operating instructions for the Network Service menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1187 ...

Page 1188: ...mother board or to enter the information manually Default Use the following IP address Value Range Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Maintenance Console Location 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Basic Settings Feature Manual References 5 1 2 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Assignment LAN Setting IP Address Specifies the IP address of the mother board T...

Page 1189: ...5 0 255 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Basic Settings LAN Setting Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the network This parameter is only available for entering values when Use the following IP address is selected Default Not stored Value Range 0 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console L...

Page 1190: ...tically Use the following DNS server address Maintenance Console Location 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Basic Settings Feature Manual References 5 1 2 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Assignment DNS Setting Preferred DNS IP Address Specifies the preferred IP address for the DNS server This parameter is only available for entering values when Use the following DNS server address i...

Page 1191: ... VPN will not be possible do not set a destination IP address in the VPN for this setting If this setting is configured at the same time as the following settings this setting takes precedence 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings Static IP Alternative DNS IP Address 27 2 1 Router Configuration Setup 1 2 1 WAN Connection Settings DHCP Alternative DNS IP Address 27 2 1 Rou...

Page 1192: ...1 2 DSP Card 2 1 DSP Card 2 2 IP Address Specifies the IP address of the DSP card This parameter is only available for entering values when Use the following DSP IP address is selected Default 192 168 0 102 Value Range 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Basic Settings DSP IP Setting DSP Card 1 1 DSP Card 1 2 DSP Card 2 1 DSP Card 2 2 MAC Ad...

Page 1193: ...d Settings LAN Port MDI MDIX Specifies the cable type connected to the LAN port Default Auto Value Range Auto MDI MDIX Maintenance Console Location 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Advanced Settings WAN Port Speed Duplex Specifies the connection mode of the WAN port The connection is made in 100 Mbps half duplex when Auto negotiation fails Default Auto Value Range Auto Automatic mode select...

Page 1194: ...ervice 1 IP Address Ports Advanced Settings Maintenance Port Speed Duplex Specifies the connection mode of the maintenance port The connection is made in 100Mbps half duplex when Auto negotiation fails This setting is available at Installer level only Default Auto Value Range Auto Automatic mode selection 1000M Full 1000 Mbps full duplex 100M Full 100 Mbps full duplex 100M Half 100 Mbps half duple...

Page 1195: ...e DHCP client of the PBX They are for reference only Assigned IP Address IP Address Indicates the assigned IP address of the mother board reference only Default Not stored Maintenance Console Location 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Reference Assigned IP Address MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the mother board reference only Default Not stored Maintenance Console Location 28 1 Net...

Page 1196: ...twork Service 1 IP Address Ports Reference Assigned WAN IP Address MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the mother board reference only Default Not stored Maintenance Console Location 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Reference Assigned WAN IP Address Subnet Mask Indicates the network mask address of the mother board reference only Default Not stored Maintenance Console Location 28 1 Net...

Page 1197: ...only Default Not stored Maintenance Console Location 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Reference DSP Card 1 1 DSP Card 1 2 DSP Card 2 1 DSP Card 2 2 IP Address Indicates the IP address assigned for an installed optional DSP card reference only Default Not stored Maintenance Console Location 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Reference DSP Card 1 1 DSP Card 1 2 DSP Card 2 1 DSP Card 2 2 ...

Page 1198: ... 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Reference DSP Card 1 1 DSP Card 1 2 DSP Card 2 1 DSP Card 2 2 Default Gateway Indicates the Default Gateway address of the DSP card reference only Default Not stored Maintenance Console Location 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports Reference 1198 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 28 1 Network Service 1 IP Address Ports ...

Page 1199: ...ue Range Disable DHCP Server DHCP Relay Agent Maintenance Console Location 28 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP Port number Specifies the port number used for the DHCP server Default 67 Value Range 67 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 28 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP Server IP address for Relay Specifies the IP address for the DHCP server for DHCP Relay This setting i...

Page 1200: ...range of IP addresses Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 28 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP Lease interval h Specifies the duration in hours of the DHCP allocation lease Setting 0 specifies an unlimited lease duration Default 24 hours Value Range 1 168 hours Maintenance Console Location 28 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP Auto...

Page 1201: ...ole Location 28 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP IP Address Specifies the IP addresses of the MAC address IP address pairs to be subject to static DHCP allocation Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 28 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP IP Address Assignment List MAC Address Specifies MAC addresses currently specified by the syste...

Page 1202: ...255 255 Maintenance Console Location 28 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP Remaining lease time Specifies the remaining lease time for the MAC address IP address pair Default Not stored Value Range 1 85777 s Maintenance Console Location 28 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP 1202 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 28 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP ...

Page 1203: ...ecifies the minimum port number for FTP data transfer Default 40000 Value Range 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 28 2 2 Network Service 2 2 Server Feature FTP Data Transfer Port Port number Maximum Specifies the maximum port number for FTP data transfer Default 40095 Value Range 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 28 2 2 Network Service 2 2 Server Feature FTP User Information User Name ...

Page 1204: ... FTP User Information Password Specifies the password for the PBX s FTP server authentication Note Be sure to change the password from its initial default value Also for security reasons change the password regularly Default 1234 Value Range Max 24 characters A Z a z 0 9 hyphen underscore Note The first character must be a letter or number Maintenance Console Location 28 2 2 Network Service 2 2 Se...

Page 1205: ... Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 28 2 3 Network Service 2 4 Server Feature HTTP HTTPs LAN MNT Port number Specifies the port number for HTTPs connections This port is used for accessing the PBX for Web Maintenance Console programming when using a TLS connection Default 443 Value Range 443 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 28 2 3 Network Service 2 4 Server Featu...

Page 1206: ...Specifies how HTTPs WAN is disabled If you enabled the HTTPs WAN port and select Automatic 24H it will be disabled automatically after 24 hours for security purposes Default Automatic 24H Value Range Automatic 24H Manual Maintenance Console Location 28 2 3 Network Service 2 4 Server Feature HTTP Automatic logout Timer min Specifies the amount of time required to elapse before logging off an inacti...

Page 1207: ...Maintenance Console Location 28 2 3 Network Service 2 4 Server Feature HTTP Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1207 28 2 3 Network Service 2 4 Server Feature HTTP ...

Page 1208: ...his feature is disabled connected KX UT series SIP phones will use their individually programmed time settings Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 28 2 4 Network Service 2 5 Server Feature NTP PC Programming Manual References 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Daylight Saving SNTP SNTP Server IP Address 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date...

Page 1209: ...ages sent from the PBX This address for example could be set as the e mail address of an administrator Default Not stored Value Range Max 128 characters Maintenance Console Location 28 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP SMTP server for relay SMTP server address IP Address Specifies the IP address of the SMTP server to be used to send e mails Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 ...

Page 1210: ... Default 25 Value Range 25 465 587 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 28 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP SMTP server for relay SMTP over TLS Specifies whether the SMTP server uses Transport Layer Security Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Note When Enable is selected the encryption method used is STARTTLS Maintenance Console Location 28 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feat...

Page 1211: ...SMTP SMTP Authentication Password Specifies the password required to access the SMTP server Default Not stored Value Range Max 64 characters Maintenance Console Location 28 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP POP Before SMTP POP before SMTP Specifies whether POP before SMTP is enabled on the SMTP server Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 28 2 5 Network ...

Page 1212: ... Value Range Max 128 characters Maintenance Console Location 28 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP POP Before SMTP POP server Port number Specifies the port number of the POP server when POP before SMTP is enabled Default 110 Value Range 110 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 28 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP POP Before SMTP User Name Specifies the user name for the POP ...

Page 1213: ...s enabled for mail receiving Default Enable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 28 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP Mail Receiving SMTP over TLS Specifies whether mail receiving uses Transport Layer Security for SMTP Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 28 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP Mail Receiving Receive Port numbe...

Page 1214: ...Mail Receiving Receive Port number SMTP Specifies the receiving port number when using SMTP Default 25 Value Range 25 465 587 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 28 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP 1214 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 28 2 5 Network Service 2 6 Server Feature SMTP ...

Page 1215: ...lue is 143 Default 143 Value Range 143 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 28 2 6 Network Service 2 7 Server Feature IMAP4 IMAP4 over TLS IMAP4 over TLS Specifies whether to enable TLS encryption for the IMAP4 server functions of the PBX Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 28 2 6 Network Service 2 7 Server Feature IMAP4 IMAP4 over TLS Port number Specifies a...

Page 1216: ...Location 28 2 6 Network Service 2 7 Server Feature IMAP4 Authenticated Connection Timeout Authenticated Connection Timeout min Specifies the amount of time of no activity that is required before an authenticated connection to the IMAP4 server will be disconnected Default 30 Value Range 1 2 3 5 10 15 20 25 30 60 min Maintenance Console Location 28 2 6 Network Service 2 7 Server Feature IMAP4 1216 P...

Page 1217: ...ure TELNET Port number Specifies a port number for the TELNET server Default 30023 Value Range 23 1024 65535 Maintenance Console Location 28 2 7 Network Service 2 8 Server Feature TELNET User name Specifies a user name for the TELNET server to log in Default telnetuser Value Range Max 24 characters a z 0 9 hyphen underscore Maintenance Console Location 28 2 7 Network Service 2 8 Server Feature TEL...

Page 1218: ...ange Max 24 characters a z 0 9 hyphen underscore Maintenance Console Location 28 2 7 Network Service 2 8 Server Feature TELNET 1218 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 28 2 7 Network Service 2 8 Server Feature TELNET ...

Page 1219: ...ork Service 3 1 Client Feature FTP IP Address Specifies the IP address of the FTP site Click the IP Address radio button when this is used Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 28 3 1 Network Service 3 1 Client Feature FTP Name Specifies the name of the FTP site Click the Name radio button when this is used Default Not stored Value Range FTP site name ...

Page 1220: ...phen underscore Note The first character must be a letter or number may only be used as the final character Maintenance Console Location 28 3 1 Network Service 3 1 Client Feature FTP Password Specifies the password for the user name required to log in to the FTP site Default Not stored Value Range Max 24 characters A Z a z 0 9 hyphen underscore Note The first character must be a letter number or M...

Page 1221: ... FTP connection Default FTPS Explicit Value Range FTP FTPS Explicit FTPS Implicit Maintenance Console Location 28 3 1 Network Service 3 1 Client Feature FTP Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1221 28 3 1 Network Service 3 1 Client Feature FTP ...

Page 1222: ...es the IP address or host name of the external Syslog server Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 IP address Max 253 characters host name Maintenance Console Location 28 3 2 Network Service 3 2 Client Feature Syslog Installation Manual References 8 6 5 DNS Client Port Specifies the connection port for the remote Syslog server Default 514 Value Range 514 1024 65535 Maintenance Con...

Page 1223: ... Enable Maintenance Console Location 28 3 3 Network Service 3 3 Client Feature SNMP Agent Feature Manual References 18 1 7 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol System Monitor SNMP version Specifies the version of the SNMP protocol to use Default SNMP V2c Value Range SNMP V1 SNMP V2c Maintenance Console Location 28 3 3 Network Service 3 3 Client Feature SNMP Agent Feature Manual References 18 1 ...

Page 1224: ...Feature Manual References 18 1 7 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol System Monitor MIB info SysName Specifies the administrative name for the system Default KX NS1000 Value Range Max 255 characters Maintenance Console Location 28 3 3 Network Service 3 3 Client Feature SNMP Agent Feature Manual References 18 1 7 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol System Monitor MIB info SysLocation Specif...

Page 1225: ...er Click the button next to IP Address and enter the address Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 28 3 3 Network Service 3 3 Client Feature SNMP Agent Feature Manual References 18 1 7 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol System Monitor Host name Specifies the host name of an SNMP manager Click the button next to Host Name and enter a name Default N...

Page 1226: ... name Specifies a community name of an SNMP manager Default public Value Range Max 32 characters Maintenance Console Location 28 3 3 Network Service 3 3 Client Feature SNMP Agent Feature Manual References 18 1 7 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol System Monitor TRAP filtering Standard TRAP Selects whether the PBX sends standard trap messages to an SNMP manager or not Default Enable Value Rang...

Page 1227: ...gent Feature Manual References 18 1 7 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol System Monitor TRAP filtering enterpriseSpecific Minor Selects whether the PBX sends Minor Alarm trap messages to an SNMP manager or not Default Enable Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 28 3 3 Network Service 3 3 Client Feature SNMP Agent Feature Manual References 18 1 7 SNMP Simple Network Manageme...

Page 1228: ...e 4 1 Other Security ICMP Echo Reply Log Output Specifies if the PBX logs ICMP echo replies Default Disable Value Range Enable Disable Maintenance Console Location 28 4 1 Network Service 4 1 Other Security TLS Encryption Suite Specifies the method of encryption used for TLS Default DES CBC3 SHA Value Range AES256 SHA DES CBC3 SHA AES128 SHA DES CBC SHA Maintenance Console Location 28 4 1 Network S...

Page 1229: ...le Location 28 4 2 Network Service 4 2 Other NAS NAS Setting Protocol Specifies the communication protocol for the NAS connection Default NFS Value Range NFS CIFS Maintenance Console Location 28 4 2 Network Service 4 2 Other NAS NAS Setting NAS Address IP Address Specifies the IP address of the NAS Default Not stored Value Range 1 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 Maintenance Console Location 28 4 2 Network S...

Page 1230: ...rk Service 4 2 Other NAS NAS Setting Mount directory Specifies the NAS mount directory Default Not stored Value Range Max 128 characters multi byte characters allowed Maintenance Console Location 28 4 2 Network Service 4 2 Other NAS CIFS Setting User Name Specifies the NAS connection user name when NAS Setting Protocol is set to CIFS Default Not stored Value Range Max 24 characters multi byte char...

Page 1231: ...he NAS connection password when NAS Setting Protocol is set to CIFS Default Not stored Value Range Max 24 characters multi byte characters allowed Maintenance Console Location 28 4 2 Network Service 4 2 Other NAS Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1231 28 4 2 Network Service 4 2 Other NAS ...

Page 1232: ...1232 PC Programming Manual Document Version 2016 03 28 4 2 Network Service 4 2 Other NAS ...

Page 1233: ...Section 29 Appendix Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1233 ...

Page 1234: ... 1 2 System Control Program Update Update Program File 6 1 Tool System Data Backup 6 1 2 Tool System Data Backup Backup to NAS 6 5 Tool Import 6 8 1 Tool UM Data Backup Manual Backup 6 8 2 Tool UM Data Backup Scheduled Backup 6 9 Tool UM Data Restore 6 13 Tool UT Option Setting 7 4 4 Utility Monitor Trace CS Status Monitor Air Sync Group 8 1 Users User Profiles 8 2 1 Users Add User Single User 8 2...

Page 1235: ... PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone 13 4 PBX Configuration 5 4 Optional Device External Relay 13 5 PBX Configuration 5 5 Optional Device External Sensor 14 1 PBX C...

Page 1236: ...ull Setting 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service 27 1 2 Router Configuration Setup 1 1 2 Router Information PPPoE Status 27 1 3 Router Configuration Setup 1 1 3 Router Information VPN Status 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec SA Option 28 2 3 Network Service 2 4 Server Feature HTTP HTTPs WAN HTTPs server Feature Programming References 29 1 3 PCMPR Software File Version 004 0xxxx New Cont...

Page 1237: ... 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Key Setting 19 2 PBX Configuration 11 2 Maintenance CS Synchronization 27 10 Router Configuration VPN 3 2 IPSec 28 2 3 Network Service 2 4 Server Feature HTTP Feature Programming References 29 1 4 PCMPR Software File Version 004 1xxxx New Contents 8 4 1 Users ICDG Management...

Page 1238: ...ot Site Property Main Main LLDP Packet Sending Ability 9 8 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property Port Type View Type 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Port Property Main Air Sync Group No 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Port Property Secondary Setting CS Name Primary Secondary 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Port Prop...

Page 1239: ...nance Console On line Mode 5 4 System Control System Reset 7 10 3 Utility Automatic Two way Recording Extension Setting List 8 4 2 Users ICDG Management ACD Report Call Call View Report 9 3 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Activation Key Status Activated Feature 9 5 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Main Media Relay SIP Extension UT Extension NAT SIP Proxy Server Por...

Page 1240: ...n Features SIP Refer Blind 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Programming References 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Mailbox Password Message Client 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Notification Parameters E mail Text Message Device Device No 1 2 3 E mail Address 26 1 UM Configuratio...

Page 1241: ...Feature Programming References Document Version 2016 03 PC Programming Manual 1241 ...

Page 1242: ...l Extension Inter digit 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 3 Dial Tone Dial Tone for ARS 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 ARS Itemized Code 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 ARS Itemized Code 14 3 PBX Configuration 6 3 Feature Verification Code Itemized Billing Code for ARS ...

Page 1243: ...ting 9 19 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPCS4 Port Property Option Announce Mode 9 21 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V UTEXT32 Port Property Secondary Setting Feature Manual References 2 1 7 Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX Automatic Time Adjustment 10 1 1 PBX Configuration 2 1 1 System Date Time Date Time Setting 10 1 2 PBX Configuration 2 1 2 System Date Time SNTP Dayl...

Page 1244: ...unication Assistant System status retry interval timer Built in Communication Assistant System status retry counter 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 9 Built in Communication Assistant 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 9 Built in Communication Assistant Feature Manual References 4 1 1 CA Communicatio...

Page 1245: ...og Memory Feature Manual References 4 1 5 Call Log Incoming Call Monitor 10 6 3 PBX Configuration 2 6 3 System Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Call Monitor 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Executive Call Monitor 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Data Mode Option 3 Executive Override Deny 12 2 1 PBX Configura...

Page 1246: ... Transfer to CO Assistant Transfer to busy Extension w o BSS Operation 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 4 DSS Key Automatic Transfer for Extension Call 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Transfer Recall Destination 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Transfer Recall Destinatio...

Page 1247: ...Waiting for Extension Call Option 2 Automatic C Waiting Option 4 Call Waiting Tone Type Feature Manual References 4 1 12 Call Waiting Tone Caller ID 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Miscellaneous Caller ID Waiting to receive Caller ID Visual Caller ID Display 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 4 Private Network Public Call through Private Network Minimum Publi...

Page 1248: ...guration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main CLIP on ICD Group Button 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Extension Number CLIP CLIP ID CLIP CLIP on Extension CO CLIP CLIR CLIP COLR 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extensio...

Page 1249: ...Group Trunk Group TRG Settings Main CO CO Duration Time 60s Extension CO Duration Time 60s 15 5 PBX Configuration 7 5 TRS Miscellaneous Dial Digits Limitation After Answering Dial Digits Feature Manual References 4 1 17 CO Line Call Limitation Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs 17 1 PBX Configuration 9 1 Private Network TIE Table Feature Manual References 15 1 12 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES Common...

Page 1250: ...11 9 1 PBX Configuration 3 9 Group Conference Group Member List Feature Manual References 4 1 19 Conference Group Call Confirmation Tone 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone 1 Called by Voice Confirmation Tone Tone 2 Paged Automatic Answer Confirmation Tone Tone 3 1 Start Talking after Making Call Call from DOORPHONE Confirmation Tone Tone 3 2 Start Talk...

Page 1251: ...P Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Assignment 28 2 1 Network Service 2 1 Server Feature DHCP Feature Manual References 5 1 2 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Assignment Dial Mode Selection 9 25 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property LCO Port Dialing Mode DTMF Width Pulse Speed Feature Manual References 5 1 4 Dial Mode Selection Dial Tone 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System...

Page 1252: ...ect SIP Connection 9 5 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Main 9 9 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Shelf Property 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Feature Manual References 5 1 9 Direct SIP Connection DISA Direct Inward System Access 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf DISA Delayed Ans...

Page 1253: ...all Display Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 5 Display Language Incoming Call Display Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking 18 1 PBX Configuration 10 1 CO Incoming Call CO Line Settings CO Name Feature Manual References 5 1 11 Display Information Distribution Order 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Group Inco...

Page 1254: ...Called by Voice 13 1 PBX Configuration 5 1 Optional Device Doorphone Feature Manual References 5 1 15 Doorphone Call DSP Resource Reservation 9 5 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Main DSP Conference DSP Conference Priority 9 33 PBX Configuration 1 5 Configuration DSP Resource Feature Manual References 5 1 17 DSP Resource Reservation EFA External Feature Access 9 25 PBX Conf...

Page 1255: ...ssage Device Device No 1 2 3 Send Wait Time 0 120 min E mail Text Message Device Device No 1 2 3 Attach Voice File E mail Text Message Device Device No 1 2 3 Use Mode 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters E mail Option Feature Manual References 6 1 3 E mail Notification for Manager E mail Notification of Sensor Alarm 13 5 PBX Configuration 5 5 Optional Device External Sensor Featu...

Page 1256: ...Clear 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Features Extension Feature Clear 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 2 Extension Clear Call Waiting Extension Clear Fwd DND Extension Clear Hot Line Pick up Dial Feature Manual References 6 1 9 Extension Feature Clear Extension PIN Personal Identification Number 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Mis...

Page 1257: ...Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 7 Flash Mode during CO Conversation 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Type Feature Manual References 7 1 2 Flash Recall Terminate Flexible Buttons 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Miscellaneou...

Page 1258: ... NA to CO 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings Main CO CO Duration Time 60s Extension CO Duration Time 60s 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous Status of FWD for Virtual PS 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Group Log Group FWD 11 5 3 PBX Configuration 3 5 3 Grou...

Page 1259: ...TURES Hands free Answerback 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Tone Length Reorder Tone for PT Hands free 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Assistant Automatic Answer Caller 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 1 PT Operation Automatic Answer for Call from CO after Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone 2 Paged Auto...

Page 1260: ...ial No Feature Manual References 9 1 6 Hot Line ICD Group Features Group Call Distribution 11 1 1 PBX Configuration 3 1 1 Group Trunk Group TRG Settings Main Line Hunting Order 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main Distribution Method Main Call Waiting Distribution Miscellaneous Extension No Answer Redirection Time Miscellaneous Maximum No of Bus...

Page 1261: ...xtension Number for Log in Log out 19 1 PBX Configuration 11 1 Maintenance Main SMDR Print Information Log in Log out Feature Manual References 10 1 3 ICD Group Features Log in Log out ICD Group Features Outside Destinations 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 4 Send CLIP of CO Caller when call is forwarded to CO Send CLIP of Extension Caller when call is forwarded to CO Featur...

Page 1262: ...ellaneous Feature Manual References 10 1 7 ICD Group Features Supervisory ICD Group Features VIP Call 11 5 1 PBX Configuration 3 5 1 Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous VIP Call Mode Feature Manual References 10 1 9 ICD Group Features VIP Call Idle Extension Hunting 11 6 PBX Configuration 3 6 Group Extension Hunting Group 11 6 1 PBX Configuration 3 6 Group Extension...

Page 1263: ...ination Destination is not programmed Feature Manual References 10 1 13 Intercept Routing No Destination Intercom Call 10 6 3 PBX Configuration 2 6 3 System Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Alternate Calling Ring Voice 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Extension Number Main Extension Name Option 3 Intercom Call by Voice 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 ...

Page 1264: ... 14 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Card Property 9 15 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPEXT32 Port Property Feature Manual References 10 1 17 IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network Service 9 26 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Card Property PRI type 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port 10 3 PBX ...

Page 1265: ...on Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 4 Outgoing Preferred Line 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 4 Outgoing Preferred Line Feature Manual References 12 1 3 Line Preference Outgoing Local Alarm Information 7 3 1 Utility Log Error Log 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 ...

Page 1266: ...Button Type Feature Manual References 13 1 3 Message Waiting Music on Hold 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM 10 11 1 PBX Configuration 2 11 1 System Audio Gain Paging MOH External MOH MOH 1 8 Music On Hold 1 8 Feature Manual References 13 1 4 Music on Hold Off hook Monitor 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 1 PT Operation Off Hook Monitor Feature Manual References...

Page 1267: ...on 6 Flexible Button Programming Mode 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Type Dial for One touch Feature Manual References 14 1 8 One touch Dialing Operator Features 10 2 PBX Configuration 2 2 System Operator BGM PBX Operator Day Lunch Break Night 14 6 PBX Configuration 6 6 Feature Tenant Operator Extension Number Feature Manual References 14 1 9 Operator Fea...

Page 1268: ...2 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for SDN Extension Number for SDN Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Loop CO Single CO Group CO ICD Group SDN 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for SDN Extension Number for SDN Feature Manual References 15 1 4 PDN Primary Dire...

Page 1269: ...rt Property PRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS E911 Feature Manual References 15 1 19 Private Network Features QSIG CF Call Forwarding Private Network Features QSIG CT Call Transfer 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS E911 Feature Manual...

Page 1270: ...G CCBS Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS E911 Feature Manual References 15 1 18 Private Network Features QSIG CCBS Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber Private Network Features NDSS Network Direct Station Selection 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Conf...

Page 1271: ...res TIE Line Service 9 27 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Port Property PRI Port Network Numbering Plan Trunk Property 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Miscellaneous Incoming Call Inter digit Timer TIE 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Features Idle Line Access Local Access Trunk Group Access TIE Line Access 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Nu...

Page 1272: ...ibution Group Group Settings Main Distribution Method 11 8 PBX Configuration 3 8 Group PS Ring Group 11 8 1 PBX Configuration 3 8 Group PS Ring Group Member List Feature Manual References 15 1 27 PS Ring Group PS Portable Station 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Feature Manual References 15 1 24 PS Portable Station P SIP Panasonic SIP Phones 9 16 PBX Configuration 1 1 Conf...

Page 1273: ...atterns Call from CO Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 10 8 2 PBX Configuration 2 8 2 System Ring Tone Patterns Call from DOORPHONE Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 10 8 3 PBX Configuration 2 8 3 System Ring Tone Patterns Call from Others Extension Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 1 PT Operation PT Ring Off Setting 12 1 1 PBX Configuration 4 1 1 Extension Wired...

Page 1274: ...rs for Networking Survivability assigned to Remote SIP MLT NAT CWMP Server HTTPS Port No Control Condition of Remote SIP MLT PERIODIC Ability 9 5 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site Property Main Port Number Firmware Update Port No for IP PT IP CS Media Relay Control Condition of Remote SIP MLT PERIODIC Packet Sending Interval Time s 9 5 1 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot Site ...

Page 1275: ...onfiguration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Card Property 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Feature Manual References 18 1 3 SIP Session Initiation Protocol CO Line SMDR Station Message Detail Recording 10 3 PBX Configuration 2 3 System Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Analogue CO Call Duration Start 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service...

Page 1276: ...1 11 Stacking Connection Syslog Record Management 28 3 2 Network Service 3 2 Client Feature Syslog Feature Manual References 18 1 12 Syslog Record Management TAFAS Trunk Answer From Any Station 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Features TAFAS Answer 10 11 1 PBX Configuration 2 11 1 System Audio Gain Paging MOH Paging EPG 1 6 External Pager 1 6 13 2 PBX Configuration 5 2 Opt...

Page 1277: ...pe Parameter Selection for Time Service Parameter Selection for Time Service Automatic Manual Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Time Service 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Time Service Parameter Selection for Time Service Automatic Manual Optional Parameter or Ringing Tone Type Number for Time Service Feature Man...

Page 1278: ...2 PBX Configuration 7 2 TRS Exception Code 15 3 PBX Configuration 7 3 TRS Special Carrier 15 5 PBX Configuration 7 5 TRS Miscellaneous Feature Manual References 19 1 5 TRS Toll Restriction Trunk Adaptor Connection 9 11 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V SIPGW Port Property Trunk Adaptor Connection Attribute Channel Attribute 9 13 PBX Configuration 1 1 Configuration Slot V IPGW16 Port Prope...

Page 1279: ...s 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Fax Management Feature Manual References 20 1 77 Unified Messaging Send to Fax Machine Unified Messaging Alternate Extension Group 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Alternate Extension Feature Manual References 20 1 3 Unified Messaging Alternate Extension Group Unified Messaging Auto Forwarding 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2...

Page 1280: ...n 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Remote Call Automatic Login Direct Service Auto Login Extension Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement Auto Login Caller ID 1 2 Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement Auto Login DDI DID Auto Login TRG No Auto Login DDI DID TRG No Password Entry Requirement Auto Login Toll Saver Feature Manual References 20 1 8 Unified Messaging Automatic Login ...

Page 1281: ... Transfer to Outside 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Transfer to Outside Feature Manual References 20 1 16 Unified Messaging Call Transfer to Outside Unified Messaging Caller ID Call Routing 23 1 UM Configuration 4 1 Service Settings Caller ID PIN Call Routing Feature Manual References 20 1 18 Unified Messaging Caller ID Call Routing Unified Messaging Caller ID Callback 21 1...

Page 1282: ...ight Lunch and Break Mode Company Greeting No Other 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters Daily Hours Setting Feature Manual References 20 1 24 Unified Messaging Company Greeting Unified Messaging Covering Extension 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Covering Extension Feature Manual References 20 1 26 Unified Messaging Covering Extension ...

Page 1283: ...uto FWD Personal Custom Serv External Message Delivery Active External Message Delivery Prompt Mode 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameters Extension 24 4 UM Configuration 5 4 System Parameters Parameters External Message Delivery Feature Manual References 20 1 35 Unified Messaging External Message Delivery Service Unified Messaging Group Distribution Lists 20 ...

Page 1284: ...omplete Call Handling for No Answer Incomplete Call Handling for Busy Feature Manual References 20 1 46 Unified Messaging Incomplete Call Handling Service Unified Messaging Intercept Routing to a Mailbox 11 7 1 PBX Configuration 3 7 1 Group UM Group System Settings Intercept to Mailbox for Call to Extension Feature Manual References 20 1 47 Unified Messaging Intercept Routing to a Mailbox Unified ...

Page 1285: ... Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameters All Calls Transfer to Mailbox Feature Manual References 20 1 52 Unified Messaging Logical Extension All Calls Transfer to Mailbox Unified Messaging Mailbox 7 5 3 Utility Report UM View Reports 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Feature Manual References 20 1 53 Unified Messaging Mailbox Unified Messaging Manager Service Switc...

Page 1286: ... 20 1 58 Unified Messaging Message Waiting Notification E mail Device Unified Messaging Message Waiting Notification Lamp 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Notification Parameters Message Waiting Lamp Feature Manual References 20 1 59 Unified Messaging Message Waiting Notification Lamp Unified Messaging Message Waiting Notification Telephone Device 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1...

Page 1287: ...rator Service Operator Service Operator s Extension Operator Service Operator s Mailbox Operator Service Busy Coverage Mode Operator Service No Answer Coverage Mode Operator Service Operator No Answer Time 10 60 s Feature Manual References 20 1 65 Unified Messaging Operator Service Unified Messaging Password Administration 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Mailbox Parameter...

Page 1288: ...ration 3 UM Extension Trunk Service Feature Manual References 20 1 71 Unified Messaging Port Service Unified Messaging Remote Call Forwarding Set 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Remote Call Automatic Login Direct Service Remote Call Telephone Number 1 2 Feature Manual References 20 1 75 Unified Messaging Remote Call Forwarding Set Unified Messaging Subscriber Tutorial 21 ...

Page 1289: ...ntry Requirement Auto Login DDI DID Auto Login TRG No Auto Login DDI DID TRG No Password Entry Requirement Auto Login Toll Saver 23 2 UM Configuration 4 2 Service Settings Parameters Toll Saver Delayed Answer Time for New Message 5 60 s Delayed Answer Time for No New Message 5 60 s Feature Manual References 20 1 86 Unified Messaging Toll Saver Unified Messaging Transfer Recall to a Mailbox 10 3 PB...

Page 1290: ...nt Messages 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting External MSG Delivery Auto FWD Personal Custom Serv Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent 20 1 2 UM Configuration 1 2 Mailbox Settings Full Setting Announce Number of Messages Subscriber Service New Urgent Messages Receiving Message Service New Urgent Messages 21 1 UM Configuration 2 Class of Service Mailbox First Playback Urgent ...

Page 1291: ...wer Mode 12 1 4 PBX Configuration 4 1 4 Extension Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Extension Number for Two way Record Extension Number for Two way Transfer Extension Number for Voice Mail Transfer Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer 12 2 1 PBX Configuration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 4 LCS Recording Mode 12 2 3 PBX Configuration 4 2 3 Extension Portable Stat...

Page 1292: ...guration 4 2 1 Extension Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 ARS Itemized Code 14 3 PBX Configuration 6 3 Feature Verification Code Feature Manual References 21 1 1 Verification Code Entry Virtual PS 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Configuration Portable Station Registration Feature Manual References 21 1 2 Virtual PS Walking COS 10 6 1 PBX Configuration 2 6 1 System Numbering Plan Main Featur...

Page 1293: ... 2 6 3 System Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override 2 10 7 1 PBX Configuration 2 7 1 System Class of Service COS Settings Assistant OHCA Whisper OHCA 10 9 PBX Configuration 2 9 System System Options Option 5 Whisper OHCA for SLT Feature Manual References 22 1 5 Whisper OHCA Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 9 30 PBX Configuration 1 2 Co...

Page 1294: ...material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd and may be reproduced for internal use only All other reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd 2013 PNQX3636TA DD0413MH6036 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for KX-NS1000

V2 WES-EASY Manual preview
WES-EASY
Brand: V2 Pages: 48
Concertone RV2003H Operating Instructions Manual preview
RV2003H
Brand: Concertone Pages: 12
HydroQuip PLATINUM PS-9003 Installation & Operation Manual preview
PLATINUM PS-9003
Brand: HydroQuip Pages: 24
Polycom realpresence trio 8800 Features Manual preview
realpresence trio 8800
Brand: Polycom Pages: 7
Weber Markoprint iJET Operating Manual preview
Markoprint iJET
Brand: Weber Pages: 127
Roger MC16-PAC-2-KIT Installation Manual preview
MC16-PAC-2-KIT
Brand: Roger Pages: 2
Purelogic HYD-2100 Instruction Manual preview
HYD-2100
Brand: Purelogic Pages: 60
Data Aire gPod Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual preview
gPod
Brand: Data Aire Pages: 100
Worldcast Systems AUDEMAT FM PROBE User Manual preview
AUDEMAT FM PROBE
Brand: Worldcast Systems Pages: 80
JETI model DUPLEX REX3 User Manual preview
DUPLEX REX3
Brand: JETI model Pages: 64
Close Talk Close Talk Conference System Installation Instructions preview
Close Talk Conference System
Brand: Close Talk Pages: 2
JBL AM7212/95p Quick Start Manual preview
AM7212/95p
Brand: JBL Pages: 2
Symetrix Prism 0x0 Quick Start Manual preview
Prism 0x0
Brand: Symetrix Pages: 4
ICON VCAST User Manual preview
VCAST
Brand: ICON Pages: 28
iDance GROOVE 870 Operating Instructions Manual preview
GROOVE 870
Brand: iDance Pages: 16
3M PELTOR ComTac 7 Manual preview
PELTOR ComTac 7
Brand: 3M Pages: 41
Boss Audio Systems MR100 User Manual preview
MR100
Brand: Boss Audio Systems Pages: 4
Overmax OV-CR-422 Instruction Manual preview
OV-CR-422
Brand: Overmax Pages: 32

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands